New Hanover County OGDEN FIRE STATION No. 16 · 2017-05-01 · new hanover county ogden fire station no. 16 2016153.00 index to project manual 000200 - 1 table of contents volumn

3205 RANDALL PARKWAY, SUITE 211, WILMINGTON, NORTH CAROLINA 28403 910.341.7600 FAX 910.341.7506

PROJECT MANUAL

New Hanover County OGDEN FIRE STATION No. 16

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

April 7, 2017 BMG Project Number 2016153.00

Seal

Volumn 1 of 2

NEW HANOVER COUNTY OGDEN FIRE STATION No. 16 2016153.00

INDEX TO PROJECT MANUAL 000200 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUMN 1 OF 2

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT

BID PROPOSAL

BID BOND FORM

MWBE

PAYMENT/PERFORMANCE BOND FORMS

GEO TECHNICAL REPORT &ADDENDUM LETTER 4.11.17

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY OF WORK

012100 ALLOWANCES

012200 UNIT PRICES

012300 ALTERNATES

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014200 REFERENCES

015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

017300 EXECUTION

017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

017700 CLOSE OUT PROCEDURE

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

034100 PRECAST STRUCTUAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04200 0 UNIT MASONRY

044313.16 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER

047200 CAST STONE MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING

054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

055113 METAL PAN STAIRS

DIVISION 06 – WOODS, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES



061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

061600 SHEATHING

064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

066500 EXTERIOR SYNTHETIC TRIM

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOSITURE PROTECTION

072100 THERMAL INSULATION

072726 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

074213.53 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

074646 FIBER CEMENT SIDING

075419 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES

078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

083513 FOLDING DOORS

083613 SECTIONAL DOORS

084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS

087111 DOOR HARDWARE

087111.01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

088000 GLAZING

088300 MIRRORS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092900 GYPSUM BOARD

093013 CERAMIC TILING

093023 GLASS TILING

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

096566 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

096813 TILE CARPETING

099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING

099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

101423.13 ROOM INDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE

102113.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

105613 METAL STORAGE SHELVING

107114 METAL SUNSHADES

107516 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES



DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

111700 TELLER WINDOW ACCESSORIES

113100 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

123661 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

END OF VOLUMN 1 SECTION 000200

BID PROPOSAL

OGDEN FIRE STATION

RFB # 17-0376 ______________________________________________________________________

COUNTY COMMISSIONERS

WOODY WHITE, CHAIRMAN

SKIP WATKINS, VICE-CHAIRMAN

JONATHAN BARFIELD, JR.

PATRICIA KUSEK

ROB ZAPPLE

CHRIS COUDRIET, COUNTY MANAGER

Advertisement

Section 1 - Advertisement

Pursuant to GS 143-129, sealed bids addressed to Lena Butler, Purchasing Supervisor, New Hanover

County Finance Department, 230 Government Center Drive, Suite 165, Wilmington, NC 28403 and

marked “Ogden Fire Station: RFB # 17-0376” will be accepted until 1:00 PM EST, Tuesday, May 30,

2017 for the following work:

Ogden Fire Station: Construction of a new 13,708 sf Type IIB, fully sprinklered fire station to

replace the existing Ogden Fire Station. Demolition of the existing buildings, site work, building utilities,

and other work detailed per plans and specifications by Becker Morgan.

The bids will be publicly opened and read aloud following the latest time for receipt of bids in the

New Hanover County Finance Office, Suite 165, Conference Room 500, Wilmington, North

Carolina.

Bids will be received for a Single Prime Contract. Bidders must be properly licensed under Chapter 87 of

the North Carolina General Statues.

All prime bidders on this project must be pre-qualified in accordance with New Hanover County’s Pre-

qualification Ordinance in order to bid. Bids will not be accepted unless the bidder is pre-qualified. Pre-

qualification applications may be obtained at the County Legal Department, 230 Government Center

Drive, Suite 155, Wilmington, NC 28403 or by visiting the County’s website at

http://legalinsurance.nhcgov.com/contractors-approved-for-bidding/.

Bidding Documents and Site Development Plans may be examined and/or obtained by contacting Copy

Cat at [email protected] or visit http://www.nhcgov.com/business-nhc/bids/. Persons

requesting shipment of documents shall bear the additional, non-refundable cost of shipment, if

applicable.

The County will conduct a Mandatory Pre-Bid meeting at 1:00 PM on Thursday, May 11, 2017.

The meeting will be held at the existing Ogden Fire Station located at 7375 Market Street,

Wilmington, NC 28411.

A Bid Bond Equal to 5% of the base bid price is required by all bidders. The successful bidder will be

required to provide Performance and Payment bonds equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract

price.

No Bid may be withdrawn thirty (30) days after bid opening date.

The bidder shall make good faith efforts, as defined in the bid specifications, to subcontract 10% of the

dollar value of the single prime contract to businesses owned and controlled by minorities.

The County reserves the right to waive any informalities, to reject any or all bids, and to accept that Bid

or Bids which is in the best interest of the County.

http://legalinsurance.nhcgov.com/contractors-approved-for-bidding/

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.nhcgov.com/business-nhc/bids/

Section 2 Instructions to Bidders

2.1 SCHEDULE

2.2

PRE-BID CONFERENCE

The County will conduct a Mandatory Pre-Bid meeting at 1:00 PM on Thursday,

May 11, 2017. The meeting will be held at the existing Ogden Fire Station located at

7375 Market Street, Wilmington, NC 28411. The purpose of this conference is to review

project requirements and to respond to questions from prospective bidders and their

subcontractors or material suppliers related to the intent of bidding documents.

It is requested that prospective Bidders review the bidding documents and submit their

questions to Kevin Caison by emailing [email protected] no later than 5:00 PM on

Thursday, May 18, 2017.

2.3 PREQUALIFICATION REQUIRED

All prime bidders on this project must be pre-qualified in accordance with New Hanover

County’s Pre-qualification Ordinance in order to bid. Bids will not be accepted unless

the bidder is pre-qualified. Pre-qualification applications may be obtained at the

County’s Legal Department, 230 Government Center Drive, Suite 155, Wilmington, NC

28403 or by visiting the County’s website http://legalinsurance.nhcgov.com/contractors-

approved-for-bidding/.

2.4 PROPOSAL

Proposals shall be made in strict accordance with the "Bid Proposal Package" provided

herein, and all blank spaces for bids, alternates and unit prices shall be properly filled in.

When requested alternates are not bid, the proposal may be considered incomplete. Any

modifications to the "Bid Proposal Package" (including alternates and/or unit prices) may

disqualify the bid and cause the bid to be rejected.

Advertisement Monday, May 1, 2017

Pre-Bid Meeting Thursday, May 11, at 1:00 PM

Deadline for Questions Thursday, May 18, 2017 by 5:00 PM

Deadline for Receipt of Bids Tuesday, May 30, 2017 at 1:00 PM

New Hanover County Finance Office

230 Government Center Drive, Suite 165

Wilmington, NC 28403

(Bid Opening: Conference Room 500)

Board Meeting for Award Monday, June 19, 2017 at 9:00 AM




The Bidder agrees that the "Bid Proposal Package" detached from specifications will be

considered and will have the same force and effect as if attached thereto. Photocopied or

faxed proposals will not be accepted. Numbers shall be stated both in writing and in

figures for the base bids and alternates.

Unit prices quoted in the "Bid Proposal Package" shall include overhead, profit and taxes

and shall be the full compensation for the Bidder's cost involved in the work.

Proposals may be rejected if they show omissions, alterations of form, additions not

called for, conditional bids, or irregularities of any kind.

Bidder shall identify on the bid, the minority businesses that will be utilized on the project

with corresponding total dollar value of the bid and affidavit listing good faith efforts or an

affidavit indicating work under contract will be self-performed, as required by G.S. 143-

128.2(c) and G.S. 143-128.2(f). Failure to comply with these requirements is grounds for

rejection of the bid.

2.5 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS

By submitting a bid, the Bidder is affirming that he has carefully examined all documents

pertaining to the work, the location, accessibility and general character of the site of the

work and all existing buildings and structures within and adjacent to the site, and has

satisfied himself as to the nature of the work, the condition of existing buildings and

structures, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the

material to be encountered, the character of the equipment, machinery, plant, and any

other facilities needed preliminary to and during prosecution of the work, the general and

local conditions, the construction hazards, and all other matters, including but not limited

to the labor situation which can in any way affect the work under the contract, and

including all safety measures required by the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970

and all rules and regulations issued pursuant thereto.

The Bidder further affirms by submitting a proposal that he has satisfied himself as to the

feasibility and meaning of the plans, drawings, specifications, and other contract

documents for the construction of work and that he accepts all the terms, conditions and

stipulations contained therein, and that he is prepared to work in cooperation with other

Contractors performing work on the site.

Reference is made to contract documents for the identification of those surveys and

investigative reports of subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise

affecting performance of the work which have been relied upon by the Designer/owner in

preparing the documents. The County will make copies of all such surveys and reports

available to the Bidder upon request. Each Bidder may, at his own expense, make such

additional surveys and investigations as he may deem necessary to determine his bid

price for the performance of the work. Any on-site investigation shall be done at the

convenience of the County. Any reasonable request for access to the site will be honored

by the County.

2.6 FAMILIARITY WITH LAWS

The bidders are assumed to have made themselves familiar with all laws, ordinances, and

regulations which in any manner affect those engaged or employed in the work or the

materials or equipment used in or upon the work, or in any way affects the conduct of the

work.

2.7 CODES AND STANDARDS

Wherever reference is given to codes, standard specifications or other data published by

regulating agencies including, but not limited to, national electrical codes, North Carolina

state building codes, federal specifications, ASTM specifications, various institute

specifications, etc., it shall be understood that such reference is to the latest edition including

addenda published prior to the date of the contract documents.

2.8 PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL

The bidder must submit their bid proposal on the form herewith provided, and prices

must be given both in writing and in figures (if requested). The bidder shall sign the bid

proposal. Bids not signed will be rejected.

2.9 SUBMISSION OF BID FORM

2.9.1 Bid Bond: Each bid shall be accompanied by a deposit of cash, or a cashier's

check, or a certified check on some bank or trust company insured by the Federal Deposit

Insurance Corporation in an amount equal to not less than five percent (5%) of the

proposal. In lieu of making the cash deposit as above provided, such bidder may file a bid

bond executed by a corporate surety licensed under the laws of North Carolina to execute

such bonds, conditioned that the surety will upon demand forthwith make payment to the

obligee upon said bond if the bidder fails to execute the contract in accordance with the

bid bond. This deposit shall be retained if the successful bidder fails to execute the

contract within 10 days after the award or fails to give satisfactory surety as required

herein. (Bidders providing a bid bond in lieu of the cash deposit must use the

attached bid bond form).

2.9.2 Addressee: Bids must be on the form contained in this bid package and must

be submitted in a sealed envelope properly marked “OGDEN FIRE STATION: RFB #

17-0376” and shall be addressed to County at the following address:

New Hanover County Finance Office

Attn: Lena Butler, Purchasing Supervisor

230 Government Center Drive, Suite 165


2.9.3 Unacceptable Bids: Bids submitted via telegraph, facsimile (FAX), telephone,

and electronic means, including but not limited to e-mail, in response to the

Request for Bids will not be acceptable.

2.10 LICENSING

The successful Contractor must be properly licensed to do the work in accordance with

the North Carolina General Statutes (Chapter 87, Article 1). Upon request, bidders shall

show evidence of proper license type and limitation.

2.11 LATE BIDS

Late bids will not be accepted. It is the responsibility of the Bidder to have his/her bid in

the office specified in the Request for Bids by the time and date of the opening.

2.12 COMMUNICATION

After the bid issue date, all communications between the County and prospective Bidders

regarding this bid request shall be in writing. Any inquires, requests for interpretation,

technical questions, clarification, or additional information shall be directed to Kevin

Caison, Facilities Project Manager by emailing [email protected] or faxing (910)

798-7830. All questions concerning this bid shall reference the bid number, section

number and paragraph. Questions and responses affecting the specifications of the bid

will be provided by issuance of an Addendum to all known bidders of record. Questions

related to this Request for Bids shall be received no later than 5:00 P.M., EST,

Thursday, May 18, 2017.

2.13 TIME OF BID OPENING

Bids shall be opened and read aloud. After the opening of bids, no bid may be withdrawn,

except under the provisions of General Statute 143-129.1, for a period of thirty (30) days

unless otherwise specified. Should the successful bidder default and fail to execute a

contract, the contract may be awarded to the next lowest and responsible bidder. Bids

will be publicly opened and real aloud on Tuesday, May 30, 2017 at 1:00 PM in

Conference Room 500 located within the New Hanover County Finance Department, 230

Government Center Drive, Suite 165, Wilmington, NC 28403.

2.14 WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

Bidders may withdraw or withdraw and resubmit their bid at any time prior to the closing

time for receipt of bids. No bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled closing time for

receipt of bids for a period of thirty (30) days except as provided under G.S. 143-129.1

which allows a bidder to withdraw his/her bid from consideration after the bid opening

without forfeiture of his/her bid security if the price bid was based upon a mistake, which

constituted a substantial error, provided the bid was submitted in good faith, and the

bidder submits credible evidence that the mistake was clerical in nature as opposed to a

judgment error, and was actually due to an unintentional and substantial arithmetic error


or an unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of work, labor, apparatus, supplies,

materials, equipment, or services made directly in the compilation of the bid, which

unintentional arithmetic error or unintentional omission can be clearly shown by

objective evidence drawn from inspection of the original work papers, documents or

materials used in the preparation of the bid sought to be withdrawn.

2.15 AWARD OF CONTRACT

The award of any contract resulting from this bid will be made to the lowest responsible

bidder, taking into consideration quality, performance and time specified in the bid for

the performance of the contract. In the event the lowest responsible, responsive bid is in

excess of the funds available for the project, the County may enter into negotiations with

the lowest responsible, responsive bidder and may make reasonable changes in the plans

and specifications to bring the price within the funds available for the project and award

the bid. If such negotiations prove to be unsuccessful, the County will re-advertise the

project after making such changes in the plans and specifications as may be necessary to

bring the cost of the project within the funds available.

2.16 SUBSTITUTIONS

In accordance with the provisions of G.S. 133-3, material, product, or equipment

substitutions proposed by the bidders to those specified herein can only be considered

during the bidding phase until ten (10) days prior to the receipt of bids when submitted to

the Designer/owner with sufficient data to confirm material, product, or equipment

equality. Proposed substitutions submitted after this time will be considered only as

potential change order.

Submittals for proposed substitutions shall include the following information:

a. Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer and supplier as appropriate.

b. Trade name, model or catalog designation.

c. Product data including performance and test data, reference standards, and technical

descriptions of material, product, or equipment. Include color samples and samples of

available finishes as appropriate.

d. Detailed comparison with specified products including performance capabilities,

warranties, and test results.

e. Other pertinent data including data requested by the Designer/owner to confirm

product equality.

If a proposed material, product, or equipment substitution is deemed equal by the

Designer/owner to those specified, all bidders of record will be notified by Addendum.

2.17 PERFORMANCE BOND

Each contractor shall furnish a performance bond executed by a surety company authorized

to do business in North Carolina. The bonds shall be in the full contract amount. Bonds shall

be executed in the form included with these specifications. The bond shall be countersigned

by an authorized agent of the bonding company who is licensed to do business in North

Carolina.

2.18 PAYMENT BOND

Each contractor shall furnish a performance bond executed by a surety company authorized

to do business in North Carolina. The bonds shall be in the full contract amount. Bonds shall

be executed in the form included with these specifications. The bond shall be countersigned

by an authorized agent of the bonding company who is licensed to do business in North

Carolina.

2.19 ADDENDA

Any addenda to specifications issued during the time of bidding are to be considered

covered in the proposal and in closing a contract they will become a part thereof. It shall

be the bidder’s responsibility to ascertain prior to bid time the addenda issued and to see

that his bid includes any changes thereby required.

Should the bidder find discrepancies in, or omission from, the drawings or documents or

should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify Kevin Caison by

emailing [email protected] who will send written instructions in the form of

addenda to all bidders. Notification should be no later than seven (7) days prior to the

date set for receipt of bids. Neither the owner nor the designer/owner will be responsible

for any oral instructions.

All addenda should be acknowledged by the bidder(s) on the Bid Proposal Form. However,

even if not acknowledged, by submitting a bid, the bidder has certified that he has reviewed

all issued addenda and has included all costs associated within his bid.

2.20 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Since actual damages for any delay in the completion of the work which the contractor is

required to perform under this contract are or will be difficult to determine, Bidders and

his /her sureties shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum of $500 as fixed

and agreed as liquidated damages, and not as penalty for each calendar day of delay from

the date stipulated for completion, or as modified in accordance with the terms of this

agreement until such work is satisfactorily completed and accepted. Said liquidated damages may be deducted from any payments owed to the contractor by the Owner or

collected from the sureties, whichever is deemed expedient by the Owner.

2.21 COMPLIANCE WITH BID REQUIREMENTS

Failure to comply with these provisions or any other provisions of the General Statutes of

North Carolina will result in rejection of bid.

2.22 E-VERIFY

Pursuant to N.C.G.S. § 143-48.5 (Session Law 2014-418), Contractor shall fully comply

and certify compliance of each of its subcontractors with Article 2 of Chapter 64 of the

N.C. General Statutes, including the requirement for each employer with more than 25


employees in North Carolina to verify the work authorization of its employees through

the federal E-Verify system. County shall be provided affidavits attesting to Contractor’s

and subcontractor’s compliance or exemption. Violation of the provision, unless timely

cured, shall constitute a breach of Contract.

2.23 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS

The County reserves the right to waive any or all informalities, to reject any or all bids,

and to accept that Bid or Bids which is in the best interest of the County.

FORM OF BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT ________________

__________________________________________________________________ as

principal, and _______________________________________________, as surety, who

is duly licensed to act as surety in North Carolina, are held and firmly bound unto NEW

HANOVER COUNTY obligee, in the penal sum of ___________________________

DOLLARS, lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well

and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors

and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

Signed, sealed and dated this day of 20

WHEREAS, the said principal is herewith submitting proposal for

and the principal desires to file this bid bond in lieu of making

the cash deposit as required by G.S. 143-129.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION is such, that if the principal shall be awarded the contract for which the bid is submitted and shall execute the contract and give bond for the faithful performance thereof within ten days after the award of same to the principal, then this obligation shall be null and void; but if the principal fails to so execute such contract and give performance bond as required by G.S. 143-129, the surety shall, upon demand, forthwith pay to the obligee the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. Provided further, that the bid may be withdrawn as provided by G.S. 143-129.1

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

New Hanover County

Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise (M/WBE) Program

Construction Guidelines and Affidavits

These instructions shall be included with each bid solicitation.

Page 2

New Hanover County

Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise Program

Construction Guidelines for M/WBE Participants

Policy Statement

It is the policy of New Hanover County that minority businesses, as defined by North Carolina General

Statute 143-128 have maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of contracts and

subcontracts funded in whole or in part with public funds. This includes all aspects of the County’s

contracting and procurement programs, including but not limited to construction projects, supplies and

materials, as well as professional and personal service contracts.

Goals and Good Faith Efforts

Bidders responding to this solicitation shall comply with the M/WBE program by making Good Faith

Efforts to achieve the following aspiration goals for participation.

PROJECT MBE WBE

New Hanover County Ogden Fire

Station

6% 4%

Bidders shall submit M/WBE information with their bids on the forms provided. This information will

be subject to verification by the County prior to contract award. Firms qualifying as “M/WBE” for the

County’s goals must be certified by the NC Department of Historically Underutilized Businesses

(NCHUB) or by the NC Department of Transportation (NCDOT). Firms qualifying as “WBE” must be

designated as “women-owned business and firms qualifying as “MBE” must be certified in one of the

other categories (i.e.: Black, Hispanic, Asian American, American Indian, Disabled, or Socially and

Economically Disadvantaged). Those firms who are certified as both a “WBE” and “MBE” may only

satisfy the “MBE” requirement. A complete database of NC HUB certified firms may be found at

http://www.doa.nc.gov/hub/default.aspx and NCDOT firms may be found at

https://partner.ncdot.gov/VendorDirectory/default.htmlhttps://partner.ncdot.gov/VendorDirectory/defaul

t.html.

Please note: A contractor may utilize any firm desired; however, in order for the County to count

the participation towards the goal, all M/WBE vendors who wish to do business as a minority or

female must be certified by NC HUB or NCDOT.

The Bidder shall make good faith efforts to encourage participation of M/WBEs prior to submission of

bids in order to be considered as a responsive bidder. Bidders are cautioned that even though their

submittal indicates they will meet the M/WBE goal, they should document their good faith efforts and

be prepared to submit this information, if requested.

The M/WBE’s listed by the Contractor on the Identification of Minority/Women Business Participation

which are determined by the County to be certified shall perform the work and supply the materials for

which they are listed unless the Contractors receive prior authorization from the County to perform the

work with other forces or to obtain materials from other sources. If a contractor is proposing to perform

all elements of the work with his own forces, he must be prepared to document evidence satisfactory to

the owner of similar government contracts where he has self-performed.

http://www.doa.nc.gov/hub/default.aspx

https://partner.ncdot.gov/VendorDirectory/default.htmlhttps:/partner.ncdot.gov/VendorDirectory/default.html

https://partner.ncdot.gov/VendorDirectory/default.htmlhttps:/partner.ncdot.gov/VendorDirectory/default.html

Page 3

The Contractor shall enter into and supply copies of fully executed subcontracts with each M/WBE or

supply signed Letter(s) of Intent to the Project Manager after award of contract and prior to Notice to

Proceed. Any amendments to subcontracts shall be submitted to the Project Manager prior to execution.

Page 4

Instructions

The Bidder shall provide with the bid the following documentation:

Identification of Minority/Women Business Participation

(if participation is zero, please mark zero—Blank forms will be considered nonresponsive)

Affidavit A (if subcontracting)

OR

Identification of Minority/Women Business Participation

(if participation is zero, please mark zero—Blank forms will be considered nonresponsive)

Affidavit B (if self-performing; must attest that bidder does not customarily subcontract

work on this type of project—includes supplies and materials)

Within 72 hours or 3 business days after notification of being the apparent low bidder who is

subcontracting anything must provide the following information:

Affidavit C (if aspirational goals are met or are exceeded)

OR

Affidavit D (if aspirational goals are not met)

After award of contract and prior to issuance of notice to proceed:

Letter(s) of Intent or Executed Contracts

**With each pay request, the prime contractors will submit the Proof of Payment Certification, listing

payments made to M/WBE subcontractors.

***If a change is needed in M/WBE Participation, submit a Request to Change M/WBE Participation

Form. Good Faith Efforts to substitute with another M/WBE contractor must be demonstrated.

Minimum Compliance Requirements:

All written statements, affidavits, or intentions made by the Bidder shall become a part of the agreement

between the Contractor and the County for performance of contracts. Failure to comply with any of

these statements, affidavits or intentions or with the minority business guidelines shall constitute a

breach of the contract. A finding by the County that any information submitted (either prior to award of

the contract or during the performance of the contract) is inaccurate, false, or incomplete, shall also

constitute a breach of the contract. Any such breach may result in termination of the contract in

accordance with the termination provisions contained in the contract. It shall be solely at the option of

the County whether to terminate the contract for breach or not. In determining whether a contractor has

made Good Faith Efforts, the County will evaluate all efforts made by the Contractor and will determine

compliance in regard to quantity, intensity, and results of these efforts.

Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid Attach to Bid

Page 5

NEW HANOVER COUNTY Identification of Minority/Women Business Participation I, ,

(Name of Bidder)

do hereby certify that on this project, we will use the following minority/women business enterprises as construction subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or providers of professional services. Firm Name, Address and Phone # Work type *M/WBE Category

*M/WBE categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A) American Indian (I), Female (F) Socially and Economically Disadvantaged (S) Disabled (D)

If you will not be utilizing M/WBE contractors, please certify by entering zero “0”

The total value of MBE business contracting will be ($) .

The total value of WBE business contracting will be ($) .


Page 6

NEW HANOVER COUNTY AFFIDAVIT A – Listing of Good Faith Efforts

County of

(Name of Bidder) Affidavit of

I have made a good faith effort to comply under the following areas checked:

Bidders must earn at least 50 points from the good faith efforts listed for their bid to be considered responsive. (1 NC Administrative Code 30 I.0101)

1 – (10 pts) Contacted minority businesses that reasonably could have been expected to submit a quote and that were known to the contractor, or available on State or local government maintained lists, at least 10 days before the bid date and notified them of the nature and scope of the work to be performed.

2 --(10 pts) Made the construction plans, specifications and requirements available for review by prospective minority businesses, or providing these documents to them at least 10 days before the bids are due.

3 – (15 pts) Broken down or combined elements of work into economically feasible units to facilitate minority participation.

4 – (10 pts) Worked with minority trade, community, or contractor organizations identified by the Office of Historically Underutilized Businesses and included in the bid documents that provide assistance in recruitment of minority businesses.

5 – (10 pts) Attended prebid meetings scheduled by the public owner.

6 – (20 pts) Provided assistance in getting required bonding or insurance or provided alternatives to bonding or insurance for subcontractors.

7 – (15 pts) Negotiated in good faith with interested minority businesses and did not reject them as unqualified without sound reasons based on their capabilities. Any rejection of a minority business based on lack of qualification should have the reasons documented in writing.

8 – (25 pts) Provided assistance to an otherwise qualified minority business in need of equipment, loan capital, lines of credit, or joint pay agreements to secure loans, supplies, or letters of credit, including waiving credit that is ordinarily required. Assisted minority businesses in obtaining the same unit pricing with the bidder's suppliers in order to help minority businesses in establishing credit.

9 – (20 pts) Negotiated joint venture and partnership arrangements with minority businesses in order to increase opportunities for minority business participation on a public construction or repair project when possible.

10 - (20 pts) Provided quick pay agreements and policies to enable minority contractors and suppliers to meet cash-flow demands.

The undersigned, if apparent low bidder, will enter into a formal agreement with the firms listed in the Identification of Minority/Women Business Participation schedule conditional upon scope of contract to be executed with the Owner. Substitution of contractors must be in accordance with GS143-128.2(d) Failure to abide by this statutory provision will constitute a breach of the contract. The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read the terms of the minority/women business commitment and is authorized to bind the bidder to the commitment herein set forth.

Date: Name of Authorized Officer:

Signature:

Title:

State of______________, County of

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20

Notary Public

My commission expires

SEAL


Page 7

NEW HANOVER COUNTY --AFFIDAVIT B-- Intent to Perform

Contract with Own Workforce. County of

Affidavit of (Name of Bidder)

I hereby certify that it is our intent to perform 100% of the work required for the contract.

(Name of Project)

In making this certification, the Bidder states that the Bidder does not customarily subcontract elements of this type project, and normally performs and has the capability to perform and will perform all elements of the work on this project with his/her own current work forces; and

The Bidder agrees to provide any additional information or documentation requested by the owner in support of the above statement. The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read this certification and is authorized to bind the Bidder to the commitments herein contained. Date: Name of Authorized Officer: Signature: Title: State of _________ __ , County of ________________________

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20___

Notary Public


SEAL

Do not submit with bid Do not submit with bid Do not submit with bid Do not submit with bid

Page 8

NEW HANOVER COUNTY - AFFIDAVIT C - Portion of the Work to be

Performed by M/WBE Firms

County of

(Note this form is to be submitted only by the apparent lowest responsible, responsive bidder.)

If the portion of the work to be executed by M/WBE businesses as defined in GS143-128.2(g) and 128.4(a),(b),(e)

is equal to or greater than 10% of the bidders total contract price, then the bidder must complete this affidavit.

This affidavit shall be provided by the apparent lowest responsible, responsive bidder within 72 hours after

notification of being low bidder.

Affidavit of I do hereby certify that on the (Name of Bidder)

(Project Name) Project ID# Amount of Bid: $ I will expend a minimum of % of the total dollar amount of the contract with MBE firms and a minimum of % of the total dollar amount of the contract with WBE firms. Minority/women businesses will be employed as construction subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or providers of professional services. Such work will be subcontracted to the following firms listed below. Attach additional sheets, if needed Name and Phone Number *M/WBE

Category Work description Dollar Value

*Minority categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A) American Indian (I),

Female (F) Socially and Economically Disadvantaged (S) Disabled (D)

Pursuant to GS143-128.2(d), the undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with M/WBE Firms for work listed in this

schedule conditional upon execution of a contract with the Owner. Failure to fulfill this commitment may constitute a breach

of the contract.

The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read the terms of this commitment and is authorized to bind the bidder to

the commitment herein set forth.


Signature:

Title:

State of , County of

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20

Notary Public


SEAL

Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid Do not submit with the bid

Page 9

NEW HANOVER COUNTY AFFIDAVIT D – Good Faith Efforts

County of

(Note this form is to be submitted only by the apparent lowest responsible, responsive bidder.)

If the goal of 10% participation by minority/women business is not achieved, the Bidder shall

provide the following documentation to the Owner of his good faith efforts:

Affidavit of I do hereby certify that on the (Name of Bidder)

(Project Name) Project ID# Amount of Bid $ I will expend a minimum of % of the total dollar amount of the contract with MBE

firms and a minimum of % of the total dollar amount of the contract with WBE

firms. Minority/women businesses will be employed as construction subcontractors, vendors,

suppliers or providers of professional services. Such work will be subcontracted to the following

firms listed below.

(Attach additional sheets if needed)

Name and Phone Number *M/WBE

Category Work description Dollar Value

*Minority categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A) American Indian (I),

Female (F) Socially and Economically Disadvantaged (S) Disabled (D)

Examples of documentation required to demonstrate the Bidder's good faith efforts to meet the goals set forth in these provisions include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

A. Copies of solicitations for quotes to at least three (3) minority business firms from the source

list provided by the State for each subcontract to be let under this contract (if 3 or more firms

are shown on the source list). Each solicitation shall contain a specific description of the work

to be subcontracted, location where bid documents can be reviewed, representative of the

Prime Bidder to contact, and location, date and time when quotes must be received.

B. Copies of quotes or responses received from each firm responding to the solicitation.

C. A telephone log of follow-up calls to each firm sent a solicitation.

D. For subcontracts where a minority business firm is not considered the lowest responsible sub-

bidder, copies of quotes received from all firms submitting quotes for that particular

subcontract.

E. Documentation of any contacts or correspondence to minority business, community, or

contractor organizations in an attempt to meet the goal.

F. Copy of pre-bid roster.


Page 10

G. Letter documenting efforts to provide assistance in obtaining required bonding or insurance

for minority business.

H. Letter detailing reasons for rejection of minority business due to lack of qualification.

I. Letter documenting proposed assistance offered to minority business in need of equipment,

loan capital, lines of credit, or joint pay agreements to secure loans, supplies, or letter of

credit, including waiving credit that is ordinarily required.

Failure to provide the documentation as listed in these provisions may result in rejection of the

bid and award to the next lowest responsible and responsive bidder.

Pursuant to GS143-128.2(d), the undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with M/WBE

Firms for work listed in this schedule conditional upon execution of a contract with the Owner.

Failure to fulfill this commitment may constitute a breach of the contract.

The undersigned hereby certifies that he or she has read the terms of this commitment and is

authorized to bind the bidder to the commitment herein set forth.


Signature:

Title:

State of , County of

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of

20

Notary Public


SEAL


Page 11

LETTER OF INTENT

M/WBE Subcontractor Performance

Please submit this form or executed subcontracts with M/WBE firms after award of contract and

prior to issuance of notice to proceed.

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________________________

(Project Name)

TO: _________________________________________________________________________

(Name of Prime Bidder/Architect)

The undersigned intends to perform work in connection with the above project as a:

____Minority Business Enterprise _____Women Business Enterprise

The M/WBE status of the undersigned is certified the NC Office of Historically Underutilized

Businesses (required). ___ Yes ___ No

The undersigned is prepared to perform the following described work or provide materials or

services in connection with the above project at the following dollar amount:

Work/Materials/Service Provided Dollar Amount of

Contract

Projected Start

Date

Projected End Date

_______________________________________ (Date)

______________________________________ _____________________________________ (Address) (Name & Phone No. of M/WBE Firm)

_______________________________________ ____________________________________ (Name & Title of Authorized Representative of M/WBE) (Signature of Authorized Representative of M/WBE)


Page 12

REQUEST TO CHANGE M/WBE PARTICIPATION

(Submit changes only if notified as apparent lowest bidder, continuing through project

completion)

Project: ______________________________________________________________________

Bidder or Prime Contractor: ____________________________________________________

Name & Title of Authorized Representative: _______________________________________

Address: ________________________________ Phone #: ___________________________

________________________________________ Email Address: ______________________

Total Contract Amount (including approved change orders or amendments): $__________

Name of subcontractor: _________________________________________________________

Good or service provided: _______________________________________________________

Proposed Action:

___Replace subcontractor

___Perform work with own forces

For the above actions, you must provide one of the following reasons (Please check applicable

reason):

___ The listed MBE/WBE, after having had a reasonable opportunity to do so, fails or refuses to

execute a written contract.

___The listed MBE/WBE is bankrupt or insolvent.

___The listed MBE/WBE fails or refuses to perform his/her subcontract or furnish the listed

materials.

___The work performed by the listed subcontractor is unsatisfactory according to industry

standards and is not in accordance with the plans and specifications; or the subcontractor is

substantially delaying or disrupting the progress of the work.

If replacing subcontractor:

Name of replacement subcontractor: _______________________________________________


Page 13

The M/WBE status of the contractor is certified by the NC Office of Historically Underutilized

Businesses (required). ___Yes ___No

Dollar amount of original contract $________________

Dollar amount of amended contract $ _______________

Other Proposed Action:

___Increase total dollar amount of work ___Add additional subcontractor

___Decrease total dollar amount of work ___Other

Please describe reason for requested action: _________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

If adding* additional subcontractor:

The M/WBE status of the contractor is certified by the NC Office of Historically Underutilized

Businesses (required).___Yes ___No

*Please attach Letter of Intent or executed contract document

Dollar amount of original contract $________________

Dollar amount of amended contract $ _______________

Interoffice Use Only:

Approval __Y __N

Date___________________

Signature_______________


Page 14

Pay Application No. ______

Contract No.

Purchase Order No. ______ Proof of Payment Certification

M/WBE Contractors, Suppliers, Service Providers

Project Name: ________________________________________________

Prime Contractor: _____________________________________________

Period:

Current Contract Amount (including change orders): $_________________

Requested Payment Amount for this Period: $_______________________

The following is a list of payments made to Minority Business Enterprise on this project for the above –mentioned period.

Firm Name M/WBE

Category*

Total Amount Paid from

this Pay Request

Total Contract

Amount

(including changes)

Total Amount

Remaining

*Minority categories: Black, African American (B), Hispanic (H), Asian American (A) American Indian (I), Female (F) Socially and Economically Disadvantaged (S) Disabled (D)

Date: _____________________ Certified by: ______________________________ Name

______________________________ Title

______________________________ Signature

FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND

Date of Contract:

Date of Execution:

Name of Principal:

(Contractor)

Name of Surety:

Name of Contracting Body: NEW HANOVER COUNTY

Amount of Bond:

Project:

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the principal and surety above named, are held and firmly bound unto the above named contracting body, hereinafter called the contracting body, in the penal sum of the amount stated above for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind, ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the principal entered into a certain contract with the contracting body, identified as shown above and hereto attached: NOW, THEREFORE, if the principal shall well and truly perform and fulfill all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said contract during the original term of said contract and any extensions thereof that may be granted by the contracting body, with or without notice to the surety, and during the life of any guaranty required under the contract, and shall also well and truly perform and fulfill all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of any and all duly authorized modifications of said contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which modifications to the surety being hereby waived, then, this obligation to be void; otherwise to remain in full force and virtue.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have executed this instrument under their several seals on the date indicated above, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. Executed in counterparts.

Witness: ____________________________________

Contractor: (Trade or Corporate Name)

_______________________________ By: ________________________________

(Proprietorship or Partnership)

Attest: (Corporation) Title: _______________________________

(Owner, Partner, or Corp. Pres. or Vice

Pres. only)

By: _______________________________

Title: ______________________________

(Corp. Sec. or Asst. Sec. only)

(Corporate Seal)

___________________________________

(Surety Company)

Witness: By: ________________________________

________________________________ Title: _______________________________

(Attorney in Fact)

Countersigned:

________________________________ (Surety Corporate Seal)

________________________________

(N.C. Licensed Resident Agent)

________________________________

________________________________

Name and Address-Surety Agency

________________________________

________________________________

Surety Company Name and N.C.

Regional or Branch Office Address

FORM OF PAYMENT BOND

Date of Contract:

Date of Execution:

Name of Principal:

(Contractor)

Name of Surety:

Name of Contracting Body: NEW HANOVER COUNTY

Amount of Bond:

Project:

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the principal and surety above named, are held and firmly bound unto the above named contracting body, hereinafter called the contracting body, in the penal sum of the amount stated above for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the principal entered into a certain contract with the contracting body identified as shown above and hereto attached: NOW, THEREFORE, if the principal shall promptly make payment to all persons supplying labor/material in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, and any and all duly authorized modifications of said contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which modifications to the surety being hereby waived, then this obligation to be void; otherwise to remain in full force and virtue. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have executed this instrument under their several seals on the date indicated above, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. Executed in counterparts.

Witness: ____________________________________

Contractor: (Trade or Corporate Name)

______________________________________ By: ________________________________

(Proprietorship or Partnership)

Attest: (Corporation) Title________________________________

(Owner, Partner, or Corp. Pres. or Vice

Pres. only)

By: ____________________________________

Title: ___________________________________

(Corp. Sec. or Asst. Sec., only)

(Corporate Seal)

____________________________________

(Surety Company)

Witness: By: ________________________________

________________________________ Title: _______________________________

(Attorney in Fact)

Countersigned:

________________________________ (Surety Corporate Seal)

________________________________

(N.C. Licensed Resident Agent)

________________________________

________________________________

Name and Address-Surety Agency

________________________________

________________________________

Surety Company Name and N.C.

Regional or Branch Office Address

Geotechnical Exploration Report

Fire Station 16

Wilmington, North Carolina

S&ME Project No. 1306-16-017

Prepared for:

New Hanover County

Property Management

200 Division Drive

Wilmington, North Carolina 28401

Prepared by:

S&ME, Inc.

3006 Hall Waters Drive, Suite 100


December 10, 2016

S&ME, Inc. | 3006 Hall Waters Drive, Suite 100 | Wilmington, NC 28405 | p 910.799.9945 | www.smeinc.com

December 10, 2016

New Hanover County

Property Management

200 Division Drive


Attention: Mr. Kevin Caison

Reference: Geotechnical Exploration Report

Fire Station 16



NC PE Firm License No. F-0176

Dear Mr. Caison:

S&ME, Inc. (S&ME) is pleased to submit this geotechnical exploration report for the referenced project

site. The work was completed in general accordance with our proposal number 13-1600538 dated

October 31, 2016. The purpose of the exploration was to evaluate subsurface conditions as they relate to

site grading and building foundations. This report presents a summary of pertinent project information,

results of field and laboratory testing, and our geotechnical engineering conclusions and

recommendations. A Site Vicinity Plan, Field Test Location Plan, CPT Sounding Logs, Hand Auger Boring

Logs, and laboratory test records are included in the Appendix.

S&ME appreciates the opportunity to provide our services on this project. Please contact us if you have

any questions regarding this report or if we may be of further assistance.

Sincerely,

S&ME, Inc.

Gunnar Goslin Keith C. Brown, P.E.

Staff Professional Vice President

Registration No. 022540


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 1

1.0 Project and Site Information

We understand New Hanover County proposes to construct a single-story fire station at 7375 Market

Street in Wilmington, North Carolina. The proposed construction will consist of a fire vehicle truck bay

and adjacent living quarters. Currently at the site, there is an existing building and associated parking lots

that will require demo prior to new construction. The proposed construction will consist of load bearing

masonry walls within the truck bay, and light gauge steel framed walls within the living quarters. We

understand maximum column and wall loads will be on the order of 70 kips and 5 kips per foot,

respectively. In addition to the fire station, one stormwater BMP pond, and an asphalt paved access drive

are planned.

Based on the provided existing and new building overlay, the existing building is located within the new

proposed building footprint. Existing site elevations range from about 41 feet to 45 feet across the site.

The proposed final floor elevation of the building has been set at 46 feet. Maximum fill and excavation

depths of 1 to 3 feet, will be required with building and parking areas. There were no wet near-surface

conditions observed at the site at the time of our site reconnaissance. Several large pine trees and

hardwood tress line the south, west, and north edges of the site.

For use in our pavement design we have assumed the following traffic distribution:

Passenger Cars – Annual Average Daily Traffic (AADT) – 78 trips

3 Axle Single Unit Trucks (Small Emergency Vehicles) AADT – 20 trips

3 Axle Ladder Trucks AADT – 16 Trips

Garbage Truck AADT – 1 trip

This equates to a design traffic of 897,000 18-kip equivalent single axle loads (ESAL’s).

2.0 Field Exploration Program

Cone penetration test (CPT) sounding locations and hand auger borings were selected and established in

the field by S&ME by estimating distances off existing site features and should be considered

approximate. Approximate test locations are shown on Figure 1 in the Appendix.

The subsurface exploration included a visual site reconnaissance and performance of five (5) CPT

soundings. Four soundings (S-01 through S-04) were performed near the proposed building footprint to

depths of approximately 40 to 67.5 feet below the existing ground surface. Sounding S-03 was

terminated by refusal at approximately 55 feet. The remaining sounding (S-5) was performed in proposed

stormwater pond areas to a depth of approximately 15 feet below the existing ground surface. S&ME

also performed 4 hand auger borings with penetrometers in pavement and storm drain locations.

2.1 Cone Penetration Test Soundings

Carolina Drilling advanced 5 cone penetration test (CPT) soundings (S-01 through S-05), as shown on the

Field Test Location Plan (Figure 2) in the Appendix. In a CPT sounding (ASTM D5778), an electronically

instrumented cone penetrometer is hydraulically pushed through the soil to measure point stress, pore


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 2

water pressure, and sleeve friction. The CPT data is used to determine soil stratigraphy and to estimate

soil parameters such as preconsolidation stress, friction angle, and undrained shear strength. Soil types

presented on CPT sounding logs are derived from Robertson’s (1990) Soil Behavior Type (SBT) Index. The

soil type determined from the SBT index is more representative of soil behavior characteristics than

traditional soil classification that is based on grain size and plasticity. Sounding logs are included in the

Appendix. Ground surface elevations shown on the CPT sounding logs were estimated from Google Earth

satellite imagery and should be considered approximate.

2.2 Hand Auger Borings

S&ME performed 4 hand auger borings (SW-1 through SW-4 – Figure 1) with dynamic cone penetrometer

(DCP) at the four corners of the site each to a depth of 4 feet to assess the nature of the near surface soils

at the proposed driveway location and determine depth to the water table. DCP testing was performed at

1-ft intervals in general accordance with ASTM STP-399. DCP testing consists of driving a 1½-inch

diameter conical point; the cone is first seated about 2 inches to embed the cone, and then the cone is

driven three increments of 1¾ inches using a 15-pound weight falling 30 inches. The number of hammer

blows to drive the cone each 1¾-inch increment is recorded, with the DCP reading taken as the average

of the three values. Logs of the hand auger borings and DCP data are included in the Appendix.

Stratification lines shown on Hand Auger Boring Logs are intended to represent approximate depths of

changes in soil types. Naturally, transitional changes in soil types are often gradual and cannot be defined

at a particular depth.

3.0 Laboratory Testing

Laboratory testing included standard Proctor, grain size analysis, and California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

testing. Laboratory tests were conducted on a bulk sample of hand auger cuttings obtained near S-05 in

the proposed storm water pond area at an approximate depth of 1 to 2 feet. Tests were performed in

general accordance with applicable ASTM test procedures. Laboratory test results are included in the

Appendix.


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 3

4.0 Surface and Subsurface Conditions

4.1 Physiography

Figure 1 - Physiography

The site is located within the Coastal Plain Physiographic Province of North Carolina as shown in Figure 1.

The Coastal Plain Province is typically characterized by marine, alluvial, and aeolian sediments that were

deposited during periods of fluctuating sea levels and moving shorelines. The soils and basal formations

in the North Carolina Coastal Plain Physiographic Province are typical of those laid down in a shallow

sloping sea bottom; interbedded sands and clays with irregular deposits of shells and layers of limestone

and cemented sands. Alluvial sands, silts, and clays are typically present near rivers and creeks. Deposits

of peat, organic silt, and organic clay are also typically present in or near current or former tidal marsh

areas in the outer portion of the Coastal Plain.

According to the 1985 Geologic Map of North Carolina, the site is underlain by the Castle Hayne

Formation of Tertiary age. This formation consists in part of light gray limestone, more or less

consolidated, and in part of light colored marl, that varies from loose to consolidated. The limestone is

usually quite fossiliferous and in many places is composed of shells. At places the shells have been

removed entirely, and the limestone is vuggy (has voids) or contains the casts and molds of the original

organisms. The top of the coastal formations on the geologic map are typically on the order of 30 to 100

feet below the ground surface. They represent basal, relatively hard formations with consistency over

large areas.

4.2 New Hanover County Soil Survey

The Soil Survey Report for New Hanover County, North Carolina, (published by the United States Department

of Agriculture Soil Conservation Service in 1977) indicates that the project site is underlain by soils classified

as the Kureb and contains both Kureb and Leon components. The following soil properties and

characteristics are given in the Soil Survey Report for New Hanover County:

SITE


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 4

Soil

Name

Typical

Depth

(inches)

Unified

Classification

Liquid

Limit

Plasticity

Index

Flooding

Frequency

High

Water

Table

(feet)

Kureb 0-89

SP --

NP

None > 6.0 feet

Leon 0-6

6-64

SP, SP-SM

SM, SP-SM

-- NP None 0.0 to 1.0

Jun - Feb

4.3 Subsurface Conditions

4.3.1 Topsoil

A surficial layer of topsoil, approximately 1 to 2 inches in thickness, was encountered at hand auger boring

SW-2. It should be anticipated that the actual topsoil depths may be greater, especially near large trees

due to rootmat. Topsoil is typically a dark-colored soil material containing roots, fibrous matter, and/or

other organic components, and is unsuitable for engineering purposes.. We note that the transition from

topsoil to underlying natural soils may be gradual. Actual topsoil depths should be expected to vary

across the site.

4.3.2 Existing Pavements

S&ME cored 4 of the 5 CPT holes (S-1, 2, 3, and 4) and three of the hand auger borings (SW-1, 3, and 4).

Asphalt thicknesses at these locations ranged from 1.5 to 3.0 inches. The asphalt was underlain by 8 to 10

inches of aggregate base course stone (ABC).

4.3.3 Coastal Plain Soils

Coastal Plain soils were encountered below the topsoil and asphalt pavement section. Coastal Plain soils

encountered typically consist of loose to very dense sand and silty sand to sounding termination depths

at several locations, and to depths of 35 to 40 feet in the remaining soundings before transitioning to soft

clays and silts. As is common in the coastal plain, intermittent layers of sand, clay, and silt are

encountered within the previously discussed sand and clay zones. Soundings were terminated 15 to 55

feet below the existing ground surface. Cone refusal was encountered at an approximate depth of 55 feet

in CPT sounding S-3.

4.4 Water Levels

Water was only encountered in one of the hand auger borings (SW-2) at approximately 2 feet below

existing ground surface. The hand auger borings were immediately backfilled following completion.

Water levels were also estimated using pore pressure data from the CPT soundings. Based on the testing,

groundwater at the time of the CPT soundings is estimated to be approximately 5 feet below existing

ground surface.


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 5

4.5 Laboratory Testing

Laboratory testing included standard Proctor, grain size analysis, and California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

testing. Laboratory tests were conducted on a bulk sample of hand auger cuttings obtained near S-05 in

the proposed storm water pond area at an approximate depth of 1 to 2 feet. Tests were performed in

general accordance with applicable ASTM test procedures.

A standard Proctor test was performed on the bulk sample resulted in a maximum dry density of 111.0

pounds per cubic foot (pcf). The corresponding optimum moisture content (OMC) was 12.0 percent. The

natural moisture content of the bulk sample was 9.0 percent, or 3.0 percent dry of OMC.

A sieve analysis performed on the bulk sample resulted in 4.0 percent gravel, 1.1 percent coarse sand, 7.1

percent medium sand, 73.6 percent fine sand, and 14.2 percent fines (silt/clay).

CBR testing was performed on a specimen from the bulk sample recompacted to 98% of its standard

Proctor maximum dry density, 2% wet of its optimum moisture content. The specimen was then soaked

for 96 hours. A corrected CBR of 10.2 was recorded. No swell was apparent during soaking.

Laboratory test results are included in the Appendix.

5.0 Conclusions and Recommendations

The subsurface exploration indicates that the site is adaptable for the proposed construction of the fire

station. Primary geotechnical considerations for this site include:

Demolition of the existing structure.

Removal of all existing utilities within proposed building areas and replacement with compacted

structural fill.

Removal of asphalt, stockpile of ABC stone, or leave ABC stone in place.

5.1 Earthwork

5.1.1 Site Preparation

Site preparation should be initiated by clearing and stripping the proposed construction areas of any

trees, shrubs, other plants, topsoil, roots, organics, and other unsuitable foundation supporting material.

The existing asphalt should be removed from the proposed construction areas. The existing stone base

course can be left in place in proposed fill areas, provided the existing stone is stable under proofroll.

The existing structures should be demolished. If any buried existing structures, pavements, slabs, or

foundations are encountered during construction, they should also be completely demolished and

removed. Any utilities that may exist within the proposed building footprint should be relocated, and any

within new pavement areas should be evaluated and relocated as needed prior to construction.

After the required initial site work has been completed, we recommend that the exposed subgrade soils

be proofrolled with a 10-ton smooth-drum self-propelled roller operating in the static mode or a loaded


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 6

dump truck to locate any areas of soft or otherwise unsuitable surface conditions. Any area that ruts or

pumps should be disced, moisture conditioned to near the soil's optimum moisture content by drying or

wetting, and recompacted. If groundwater is at its seasonal high (0 to 1 foot below the ground surface),

operating the roller in the vibratory mode should be avoided. Alternatively, unstable soils could be

undercut and replaced with compacted backfill, as discussed below.

Based on the soundings and our site observations, we anticipate potential densification or undercutting of

near-surface soils in the vicinity of sounding S-2, S-3, S-5 and in localized areas between the sounding

locations.

5.1.2 Management of Shallow Water

Based on the observed soil types in our hand auger borings and the soil descriptions from the soil survey,

we anticipate that relatively shallow water could result in an unstable soil subgrade in portions of this site

(Leon Soils). The soil survey identified the Leon soil series at this site to have very shallow (0.0 to 1.0 foot)

seasonal high water tables. Shallow water can result in weakening of the building and pavement

subgrades, and consequent failure and/or loss of support in the pavement and building floor slab areas.

If shallow water is encountered during construction, temporary ditches or French drains should be

installed to remove the perched water.

5.1.3 Placement of Structural Fill

We anticipate minimal new structural fill will be required (i.e. less than 2 feet) at this site. Where structural

fill is required to reach finished grade and is placed above existing grade, we recommend that a clean

sand, a slightly silty sand, a slightly clayey sand, or a silty sand with less than 20 percent fines and having a

Unified Soil Classification of SP, SP-SM, SP-SC, or SM be used. The fill should be free of organics and

debris, be placed in 8 to 10 inch thick lifts, and should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the

standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698). To confirm that the specified degree of

compaction is being obtained, field density testing should be performed in each fill lift by a soils

technician.

5.1.4 Reuse of On-Site Soil as Structural Fill

Based on the near-surface soils encountered in the hand augers and CPT soundings, the on-site soils

down to a depth of approximately 5 feet should be suitable for use as structural fill and backfill.

Groundwater was encountered within 2 feet of existing ground surface in the vicinity of SW-2. Soils

excavated from below the water table will require discing and drying prior to reuse as compacted

structural fill. The surficial grass rootmat and topsoil are unsuitable for reuse as structural fill. The existing

asphalt to be demolished can be reused as structural fill, provided it is milled or crushed to less than 2

inches in maximum particle size and blended with soil. The existing stone base course material can also

be reused as compacted structural fill.

5.1.5 Excavations

Installation of footings and new utilities may require excavations to depths of up to approximately 5 feet

below the existing ground surface. The excavations may require temporary sloping and/or shoring in

addition to construction dewatering. Soundings indicate that excavations will extend through low to


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 7

moderate consistency existing fill and coastal plain soils. Generally, these soils can be excavated using

trackhoes, dozers, scrapers pushed by dozers and other types of typical earthmoving equipment.

5.1.5.1 Temporary Sloping and Shoring

Temporary construction slopes and excavation shoring should be designed in strict compliance with the

most recent local, state, and federal governing regulations, including OSHA (29 CFR Part 1926) excavation

trench safety standards. Temporary excavations should be cut to a stable slope or the excavations should

be temporarily braced, depending upon the excavation depth, nearby site features, and encountered

subsurface conditions. Temporary slopes should be designed using analytical methods, as the standard

OSHA temporary slope angles for different types of soils may not be applicable for this site.

Stockpiles should be placed well away from the edge of the excavations, and their heights should be

controlled so they do not surcharge the sides of the excavations. The responsibility for excavation safety

and stability of temporary construction slopes should lie solely with the constructor. This information is

provided only as a service and under no circumstance should S&ME be assumed to be responsible for

construction site safety.

5.1.5.2 Construction Dewatering

During construction, we anticipate that the use of temporary wellpoints or pumps within the excavations

will be required to lower and control groundwater levels. Depending on the depth of the excavations,

numerous wells, both internal and external to the excavations, in addition to internal sump pumps, may

be necessary to keep the water table below the bottom of the excavations. Groundwater should be

maintained a minimum of 2 to 3 feet below the excavation bottom throughout construction to maintain

bottom stability. The dewatering system designer should also consider the influence of dewatering on

any nearby structures and roadways.

The responsibility for dewatering of construction excavations should lie solely with the contractor. This

information is provided only as a service and under no circumstance should S&ME be assumed to be

responsible for the effectiveness of the construction dewatering method(s) selected by the contractor.

5.1.6 Subgrade Repair and Improvement Methods

The exposed subgrade can deteriorate and lose support when exposed to construction traffic and adverse

weather conditions. Deterioration can occur in the form or rutting, pumping, freezing, or erosion. We

recommend that during construction, exposed subgrade surfaces be sealed at the end of each day or

when wet weather is forecast. Water should not be allowed to pond on exposed subgrades. Heavy

rubber-tired construction equipment should not be allowed to operate on exposed subgrades during wet

conditions.

Immediately prior to floor slab or pavement construction, exposed subgrade soils should be evaluated by

proofrolling to determine their stability. Soils which rut, pump, or deflect under proofrolling should be

repaired prior to ABC stone placement. Repair measures may include scarifying/drying/recompacting,

undercutting, placement of geotextiles, use of chemical additives, or some combination of these. Actual

repair measures will be influenced by project schedule and weather conditions and can only be

determined in the field by the geotechnical engineer.


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 8

5.2 Building Foundation Recommendations

Based on the CPT soundings and assumed structural loads, the building may be supported on shallow

spread footings provided the site is prepared as recommended above. The following sections provide our

geotechnical conclusions and recommendations regarding building foundation support.

5.2.1 Bearing Pressure

Shallow foundations for the building may be designed using a net allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000

pounds per square foot. All foundation excavations should be evaluated by the geotechnical engineer or

his representative prior to concrete placement to confirm the suitability of underlying materials. This

evaluation will include probing and hand augering and dynamic cone penetrometer testing. If soft or

otherwise unsuitable soils are encountered, these soils should be overexcavated and backfilled with

washed stone (NCDOT No. 57) or lean concrete. Based on the performed soundings, undercutting of

footings are anticipated within the vicinity of soundings S-2, S-3, and S-5.

If water collects in any excavations it should be removed promptly. Care should be exercised during

construction of foundations in order not to disturb bearing soils and reduce their bearing strength.

Concrete for the footings should be placed as soon as practical following excavation. If concrete

placement is delayed, placement of a concrete “mud mat” on exposed bearing soils should be considered.

5.2.2 Bearing Depth and Dimension

Footings should bear at least 18 inches below exterior grade to avoid frost penetration and develop the

design bearing capacity. Continuous wall footings should be at least 18 inches wide and isolated column

footings should be at least 24 inches wide. This recommendation is made to prevent a localized or

“punching” shear failure condition which can occur with very narrow footings.

5.2.3 Settlement

Based on conditions encountered by this exploration, anticipated structural loads, and provided the site is

prepared as recommended above, we expect that maximum total settlements beneath footings will be 1

inch or less. Differential settlements are expected to be ½ inch or less for footings bearing on similar

materials.

5.3 Floor Slab

The ground floor slab may be constructed above suitable compacted fill or stable natural soils provided

that the recommendations described above are implemented. The slab should be separated from

footings to allow for relative displacement. A modulus of subgrade reaction value (k) of 180

pci may be used to design floor slabs on properly prepared subgrades provided that at least 6 inches of

compacted aggregate base course (ABC) stone be placed beneath the floor slab to provide more uniform

slab support and to reduce damage to subgrade soils during construction. The ABC stone should be

compacted to at least 95% of its modified Proctor maximum dry density.

Exposure to the environment and construction activities will weaken the floor slab subgrade soils.

Therefore, we recommend that subgrade soils in slab areas be evaluated prior to ABC stone placement. If

deterioration of the soils has occurred, undercutting may be necessary.


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 9

Based on the results of our exploration and the assumed finish floor elevation, the floor slab will not be

below the exterior grade and will not be subjected to hydrostatic pressure from groundwater. However,

water vapor transmission through the slab is still a design consideration. Evaluating the need for and

design of a vapor retarder or vapor barrier for moisture control is outside our scope of services and

should be determined by the project architect/structural engineer based on the planned floor coverings

and the corresponding design constraints, as outlined in ACI 302.1R-04 Guide for Concrete Floor and

Slab Construction. Further, health and environmental considerations with respect to any potentially

harmful vapor transmission are also outside of our scope.

5.4 Seismic Site Classification

5.4.1 General

There are no known, mapped faults in the area of the site. Five minor earthquakes with epicenters in the

Wilmington area with magnitudes of 3.0 to 3.9 occurred between 1871 and 19681. The historic

earthquake event which influences the design seismicity of the site the most is the 1886 Charleston, South

Carolina earthquake with a magnitude of approximately 7.3.

5.4.2 Seismic Site Class

Based on the shear wave velocities measured by the seismic CPT sounding (S-3), a Seismic Site Class D

designation is appropriate for seismic design in accordance with Section 1613 of the 2012 North Carolina

Building Code.

5.4.3 Ground Motion Parameters

We recommend that the project be designed using the ground motion parameters given in the following

table:

Table 1 – Ground Motion Parameters

Method

Site

Class SS S1 SDS SD1 PGA

Seismic

Design

Category

2012 North

Carolina Building

Code

D 0.274 g 0.093 g 0.288 g 0.148 g 0.12 g D (for OC IV)

1 Map of Earthquake Epicenters in North Carolina and Portions of Adjacent States (1698-2006), North Carolina Geologic Survey.


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 10

5.4.4 Liquefaction Evaluation

We performed a seismic liquefaction triggering evaluation using the methods presented by Youd et. al.

(2001)2 and Boulanger and Idriss (2014)3 based on the design earthquake (M=7.3). The design earthquake

has a 2 percent probability of exceedance in a 50 year period. This is equivalent to an earthquake that has

the likelihood of occurring once every 2,475 years. Using the 2012 North Carolina Building Code (which is

based on the 2009 International Building Code), the design seismic event has a peak ground acceleration

(pga) of 0.115g at this site. This value was calculated using Seismic Site Class D, calculating the five-

percent damped spectral response acceleration at short periods, SDS, using the USGS website tool for U.S.

Seismic Design Maps, and dividing SDS by 2.5 per Section 1803.5.12 (2) of the 2012 North Carolina

Building Code. Based on the results of our analyses, we conclude that the site has a low liquefaction

potential for the design earthquake, and no further consideration of liquefaction is necessary for the

design of the project.

5.5 Pavement Recommendations

We anticipate that a majority of the near-surface soils in the proposed pavement areas will be sands (SM),

similar to the bulk sample tested. These soils are generally fair to good for pavement support. Based on

laboratory test results and past experience we similar soils, we recommend a CBR value of 8 as the design

value for this project. We estimate that a design modulus of subgrade reaction value (k) of 180 psi/in

should be available for subgrades compacted to 98 percent of the standard Proctor maximum dry density.

Based on the anticipated traffic and subgrade conditions (Design CBR=8, design k=180 psi/in), we

recommend the pavement thicknesses and configurations over the prepared soil subgrades given in the

following table:

Table 2 – Pavement Thickness Recommendations

Pavement Type Material Thickness (inches)

Rigid Concrete (4,000 psi; air-entrained) 7.5

Aggregate Base Course (ABC) 6

Flexible

Superpave Asphalt Surface Course

Type S-9.5B 1.5

Superpave Asphalt Intermediate

Course Type I-19.0B 2.5

Aggregate Base Course (ABC) 8

The rigid concrete pavement can be reduced by increasing the concrete strength and/or inclusion of

dowels to improve the load transfer across joints. The pavement designer should contact S&ME if there is

an interest in further exploring the reduction in pavement thickness through modification of the concrete

2 Youd. T.L. et. al. (2001), “Liquefaction Resistance of Soils: Summary Report From the 1996 NCEER and 1998 NCEER/NSF Workshops

on Evaluation of Liquefaction Resistance of Soils”, J. Geotech. Geoenviron. Eng., 127(10), 817-833.

3 Boulanger, R.W. and Idriss, I.M. (2014), CPT and SPT Based Liquefaction Triggering Procedures, Report No. UCD/CGM-14/01, Center

for Geotechnical Modeling, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of California, Davis, CA.


Fire Station 16



December 10, 2016 11

strength or inclusion of dowels.

The early placement of the graded aggregate base course will minimize the deterioration of the prepared

soil subgrades. However, some loss of graded aggregate due to rutting and surface contamination may

occur prior to final asphalt or concrete paving. Some infilling and regrading of the graded aggregate in

conjunction with sweeping with a wire broom may be required.

Pavements and bases should be constructed in accordance with the guidelines of the current edition of

the North Carolina Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures".

Materials, weather limitations, placement, and compaction are specified under appropriate sections of this

publication.

Prevention of infiltration of water into the subgrade is essential for the successful performance of any

pavement. Both the subgrade and the pavement surface should be sloped to promote surface drainage

away from the pavement structure.

Although the asphalt pavement portion should have a 20 year performance period, our experience

indicates an overlay may be needed in approximately 7 to 10 years due to normal weathering of the

asphalt surface.

6.0 Qualifications of Report

This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted engineering practice for specific

application to this project. Any wetland, environmental, or contaminant assessment efforts are beyond

the scope of this geotechnical exploration; and therefore, those issues are not addressed in this report.

The conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on the applicable standards of

our profession at the time this report was prepared. No other warranty, express or implied, is made.

The nature and extent of variations between and beyond the specific sounding locations may not become

evident until discovered during construction. If variations appear evident, then it will be necessary to re-

evaluate the recommendations of this report. In the event that any changes in the nature or design of the

proposed facility are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report should be

reviewed and conclusions of this report modified or verified in writing.

Appendix

SCALE:

PREPARED BY:

DATE:

AS SHOWN

CHECKED BY:

FIGURE

NUMBER

GHG

11/15/16

VICINITY MAP

FIRE STATION 16

WILMINGTON, NORTH CAROLINA

S&ME PROJECT NUMBER: 1306-16-017

REFERENCE: AERIAL PHOTO DATED 11/15/2016,

GOOGLE EARTH WEBSITE.

FIRE STATION 16

SCALE:

PREPARED BY:

DATE:

AS SHOWN

CHECKED BY:

FIGURE

NUMBER

GHG

11/15/16

FIELD TEST LOCATION PLAN

FIRE STATION 16

WILMINGTON, NORTH CAROLINA

S&ME PROJECT NUMBER: 1306-16-017

REFERENCE: AERIAL PHOTO DATED 11/15/2016,

GOOGLE EARTH WEBSITE.

Gravelly Sand to Sand


Sands-Clean Sand toSilty Sand


Sand Mixtures-Silty Sandto Sandy Silt


Silt Mixtures-Clay Silt toSilty Clay

Clays-Clay to Silty Clay


Electronic Filename:

Depth(ft)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

Tip Resistenceqt

(tsf)

40 80 120 160

Cone Size:5 ft

Sleeve Frictionfs

(tsf)

0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0 1 2 3

u0

Pore Pressureu2

(tsf)

0 1 2 3

Friction RatioRf

(%)

2 4 6 8

SBTBq

Nov. 7, 2016

CPT Truck/Carolina Driling

Total Depth:Termination Criteria:

Date:Estimated Water Depth:

Rig/Operator:

Page 1 of 2

S&ME Project No: 1306-16-017

Fire Station 16 (Wilmington,North Carolina)

S-01

67.5 ftMaximum Reaction Force

CP

T R

EP

OR

T -

ST

AN

DA

RD

- S

BT

BQ

130

6-16

-017

FIR

E S

TA

TIO

N 1

6 LO

GS

.GP

J S

&M

E.G

DT

11/

15/

16

Elev(ft)

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

-5

101 100

EquivalentN60

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

>>>>>>

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

Cone Penetration Test S-01




Silt Mixtures-Clay Silt toSilty Clay


Depth(ft)

50

55

60

65

Tip Resistenceqt

(tsf)

40 80 120 160

Cone Size:5 ft

Sleeve Frictionfs

(tsf)

0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0 1 2 3

u0

Pore Pressureu2

(tsf)

0 1 2 3

Friction RatioRf

(%)

2 4 6 8

SBTBq

Nov. 7, 2016




Rig/Operator:

Page 2 of 2



S-01


CP

T R

EP

OR

T -

ST

AN

DA

RD

- S

BT

BQ

130

6-16

-017

FIR

E S

TA

TIO

N 1

6 LO

GS

.GP

J S

&M

E.G

DT

11/

15/

16

Elev(ft)

-5

-10

-15

-20

101 100

EquivalentN60

>>>>>>>>>>










Depth(ft)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Tip Resistenceqt

(tsf)

40 80 120 160

Cone Size:5 ft

Sleeve Frictionfs

(tsf)

0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0 1 2 3

u0

Pore Pressureu2

(tsf)

0 1 2 3

Friction RatioRf

(%)

2 4 6 8

SBTBq

Nov. 7, 2016




Rig/Operator:

Page 1 of 1



S-02

40.0 ftTarget Depth

CP

T R

EP

OR

T -

ST

AN

DA

RD

- S

BT

BQ

130

6-16

-017

FIR

E S

TA

TIO

N 1

6 LO

GS

.GP

J S

&M

E.G

DT

11/

15/

16

Elev(ft)

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

101 100

EquivalentN60

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>











Depth(ft)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

Tip Resistenceqt

(tsf)

40 80 120 160

Cone Size:5 ft

Sleeve Frictionfs

(tsf)

0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0 1 2 3

u0

Pore Pressureu2

(tsf)

0 1 2 3

Friction RatioRf

(%)

2 4 6 8

SBTBq

Nov. 7, 2016




Rig/Operator:

Page 1 of 2



S-03


CP

T R

EP

OR

T -

ST

AN

DA

RD

- S

BT

BQ

130

6-16

-017

FIR

E S

TA

TIO

N 1

6 LO

GS

.GP

J S

&M

E.G

DT

11/

15/

16

Elev(ft)

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

-5

101 100

EquivalentN60

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

>>




Depth(ft)

50

55

Tip Resistenceqt

(tsf)

40 80 120 160

Cone Size:5 ft

Sleeve Frictionfs

(tsf)

0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0 1 2 3

u0

Pore Pressureu2

(tsf)

0 1 2 3

Friction RatioRf

(%)

2 4 6 8

SBTBq

Nov. 7, 2016




Rig/Operator:

Page 2 of 2



S-03


CP

T R

EP

OR

T -

ST

AN

DA

RD

- S

BT

BQ

130

6-16

-017

FIR

E S

TA

TIO

N 1

6 LO

GS

.GP

J S

&M

E.G

DT

11/

15/

16

Elev(ft)

-5

-10

101 100

EquivalentN60

>> >>>>>>>>>>>>







Depth(ft)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Tip Resistenceqt

(tsf)

40 80 120 160

Cone Size:5 ft

Sleeve Frictionfs

(tsf)

0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0 1 2 3

u0

Pore Pressureu2

(tsf)

0 1 2 3

Friction RatioRf

(%)

2 4 6 8

SBTBq

Nov. 7, 2016




Rig/Operator:

Page 1 of 1



S-04

41.0 ftTarget Depth

CP

T R

EP

OR

T -

ST

AN

DA

RD

- S

BT

BQ

130

6-16

-017

FIR

E S

TA

TIO

N 1

6 LO

GS

.GP

J S

&M

E.G

DT

11/

15/

16

Elev(ft)

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

101 100

EquivalentN60

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>







Depth(ft)

0

5

10

15

Tip Resistenceqt

(tsf)

40 80 120 160

Cone Size:5 ft

Sleeve Frictionfs

(tsf)

0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0 1 2 3

u0

Pore Pressureu2

(tsf)

0 1 2 3

Friction RatioRf

(%)

2 4 6 8

SBTBq

Nov. 7, 2016




Rig/Operator:

Page 1 of 1



S-05

15.1 ftTarget Depth

CP

T R

EP

OR

T -

ST

AN

DA

RD

- S

BT

BQ

130

6-16

-017

FIR

E S

TA

TIO

N 1

6 LO

GS

.GP

J S

&M

E.G

DT

11/

15/

16

Elev(ft)

45

40

35

30

101 100

EquivalentN60

>>>>>>


ASPHALT

SANDY GRAVEL (GP)light brown, moist, Gravel Aggregate Base

SLIGHTLY SILTY SAND (SP)light brown, fine, moist

- - - Light reddish brown

Boring terminated at 4.2 ft

20

12

8

15

HAND AUGER BORING LOG: SW-1

1. PENETRATION RESISTANCE IS THE NUMBER OF BLOWS OF A 10.1 LBHAMMER FALLING 22.6 IN., DRIVING A 0.79 IN. O.D. 60 DEGREE CONE 1.75 IN.

DATE FINISHED:

1306-16-017

DATE STARTED: 11/4/16 11/4/16

G. Goslin

Water not encoutered

Cuttings

WATER LEVEL:

Fire Station 16

SAMPLING METHOD:

PROJECT:

PERFORMED BY:

NOTES:

Page 1 of 1

GR

AP

HIC

LOG

Dep

th(f

eet)

1

2

3

4

WA

TE

RLE

VE

L

ELE

VA

TIO

N(f

eet)

44.00

43.00

42.00

41.00

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

DC

P V

ALU

E

DYNAMIC CONE PENETRATION

RESISTANCE

(blows/1.75 in.)

8060302010

SILTY SAND (SM)dark brown, fine, moist

SAND (SP)gray, fine, moist

Boring terminated at 4 ft

8

9

8

5

5



DATE FINISHED:

1306-16-017

DATE STARTED: 11/4/16 11/4/16

G. Goslin

2' ATD

Cuttings

WATER LEVEL:

Fire Station 16

SAMPLING METHOD:

PROJECT:

PERFORMED BY:

NOTES:

Page 1 of 1

GR

AP

HIC

LOG

Dep

th(f

eet)

1

2

3

4

WA

TE

RLE

VE

L

ELE

VA

TIO

N(f

eet)

43.00

42.00

41.00

40.00


DC

P V

ALU

E


RESISTANCE

(blows/1.75 in.)

8060302010

ASPHALT


SAND (SP)white, fine, moist

SILTY SAND (SM)dark brown, fine, moist

Boring terminated at 4.2 ft

20

20

18

16

20



DATE FINISHED:

1306-16-017

DATE STARTED: 11/4/16 11/4/16

G. Goslin


Cuttings

WATER LEVEL:

Fire Station 16

SAMPLING METHOD:

PROJECT:

PERFORMED BY:

NOTES:

Page 1 of 1

GR

AP

HIC

LOG

Dep

th(f

eet)

1

2

3

4

WA

TE

RLE

VE

L

ELE

VA

TIO

N(f

eet)

44.00

43.00

42.00

41.00


DC

P V

ALU

E


RESISTANCE

(blows/1.75 in.)

8060302010

ASPHALT


SLIGHTLY SILTY SAND (SP)light brown, fine, moist

- - - Reddish brown

Boring terminated at 4 ft

20

10

7

15



DATE FINISHED:

1306-16-017

DATE STARTED: 11/4/16 11/4/16

G. Goslin


Cuttings

WATER LEVEL:

Fire Station 16

SAMPLING METHOD:

PROJECT:

PERFORMED BY:

NOTES:

Page 1 of 1

GR

AP

HIC

LOG

Dep

th(f

eet)

1

2

3

4

WA

TE

RLE

VE

L

ELE

VA

TIO

N(f

eet)

44.00

43.00

42.00

41.00


DC

P V

ALU

E


RESISTANCE

(blows/1.75 in.)

8060302010

S&ME, Inc.Raleigh, 3201 Spring Forest Road, Raleigh, North Carolina 27616

Technical Responsibility Signature Position

14.8%

Mal Krajan, ET

14.1%

11/26/2016

ND

Moisture Content of the Compacted Specimen

This report shall not be reproduced, except in full without the written approval of S&ME, Inc.

ND

Laboratory Manager

Test specimen was compacted to 98% at 2% wet of optimum moisture.

20.0

Notes/Deviations/References:

97.7% Percent Swell

Surcharge Weight

ND=Not Detemined.

Plastic Index

Date

12.0%

40

108.4

101.9

Liquid Limit

Client Address:

Test Date(s) 11/10 - 11/16/16

11/16/16

Before Soaking

CBR Sample Preparation:

Report Date:

N/A

Client Name:

ASTM D 698

Depth (ft):Stormwater Pond Offset:

Bulk

CBR at 0.1 in.

Corrected CBR ValuesUncorrected CBR Values

CBR at 0.2 in. CBR at 0.2 in.

Average Final Moisture Content

Fire Station #16 - Wilmington, NC

PCF

% Retained on the 3/4" sieve:

Maximum Dry Density:

200 Division Dr., Wilmington, NC 28401

Brown-Gray Poorly Graded SAND with Silt (SP-SM) and Rock Fragments

116 Sample #:

Compaction Test performed on grading complying with CBR spec. 0.0%

Surcharge Wt. per sq. Ft.

CBR at 0.1 in. 2.8

Percent Compaction

ASTM D1883, Section 7.1.1The entire gradation was used and compacted in a 6" CBR mold in accordance with

Initial Dry Density (PCF)

7.8 10.2

Moisture Content (top 1" after soaking)

Soak Time: 96-hr

-0.1%

14.2%

After Soaking

Final Dry Density (PCF)Compactive Effort (Blows per Layer)

Project Name:

108.5

Sample Date:

Location:

Boring #:

111.0 Optimum Moisture Content:

Revision Date: 2/6/08

1 - 2 ft

11/4/16

ASTM D 1883 Quality Assurance

1306-16-017Project #:

5.7

Sample Description:Method A

Form No. TR-D1883-T193-3

New Hanover County Property Manager

Revision No. 0 CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory

Compacted Soil

Corrected Value at .1"

Corrected Value at .2"

0.0

50.0

100.0

150.0

200.0

250.0

300.0

350.0

0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50

Str

ess

(P

SI

)

Strain ( inches )

S&ME, Inc. - Corporate 3201 Spring Forest Road

Raleigh, NC. 27616

116 Bulk (1 - 2 ft) CBR

Page 1 of 1

S&ME, Inc. | 3006 Hall Waters Drive, Suite 100 | Wilmington, NC 28405 | p 910.799.9945 | www.smeinc.com

April 11, 2017

New Hanover County

Property Management

200 Division Drive


Attention: Mr. Kevin Caison

Reference: Geotechnical Exploration Report Addendum

Fire Station 16 – Subgrade Support Beneath Living Quarters


S&ME Project No. 1306-16-017 Addendum

NC PE Firm License No. F-0176

Dear Mr. Caison:

S&ME has been asked to consider the use of select granular fill material in lieu of compacted ABC stone

beneath the living quarters of the proposed Fire Station 16. For clarity this substitution is not applicable

to pavement areas nor the garage area associated with the Fire Station. As such, the ground floor slab

beneath the living quarters may be constructed above suitable compacted fill or stable natural soils

provided that the recommendations described in our report dated December 10, 2017 are implemented.

The slab should be separated from footings to allow for relative displacement.

In the living quarter areas, we recommend that at least 6 inches of compacted select granular material be

placed beneath all ground floor slabs to provide a capillary break, provide more uniform slab support, and

reduce damage to subgrade soils during construction. The select granular fill should classify as SP, SP-

SM, SW, or SW-SM in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System, which requires that these

soils have less than 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Manufactured materials such as aggregate base

course (ABC), processed fill (i.e., screenings), or No. 57 washed stone meeting this specification can also

be used. A modulus of subgrade reaction value of 175 psi/in may be used to design floor slab on

subgrades consisting of these materials compacted to at least 98 percent of the soil’s standard Proctor

maximum dry density.

Exposure to the environment and construction activities will weaken the floor slab subgrade soils.

Therefore, we recommend that subgrade soils in slab areas be evaluated prior to placement of the select

granular fill. If near surface deterioration of the soils has occurred, undercutting or reworking of the fill

may be necessary.

Based on the results of our exploration and the assumed finish floor elevation, the floor slab will not be

below the exterior grade and will not be subjected to hydrostatic pressure from groundwater. However,

water vapor transmission through the slab is still a design consideration. Evaluating the need for and

design of a vapor retarder or vapor barrier for moisture control is outside our scope of services and

Geotechnical Exploration Report Addendum

Fire Station 16 – Subgrade Support Beneath Living Quarters


S&ME Project No. 1306-16-017 Addendum

April 11, 2017 2

should be determined by the project architect/structural engineer based on the planned floor coverings

and the corresponding design constraints, as outlined in ACI 302.1R-04 Guide for Concrete Floor and

Slab Construction. Further, health and environmental considerations with respect to any potentially

harmful vapor transmission are also outside of our scope.

S&ME appreciates the opportunity to provide our services on this project. Please contact us if you have

any questions regarding this report or if we may be of further assistance.

Sincerely,

S&ME, Inc.

Nathan Buffum, P.E. Keith C. Brown, P.E.

Senior Project Engineer Vice President

Registration No. 022540


SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Phased construction.

4. Owner-furnished products.

5. Access to site.

6. Work restrictions.

7. Specification and drawing conventions.

8. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: New Hanover County Ogden Fire Station No. 16.

1. Project Location: 7375 Market Street, Wilmington, North Carolina 28411.

B. Owner: New Hanover County

1. Owner's Representative: Kevin Caison.

2. Contact Email: [email protected].

C. Architect: Becker Morgan Group, Inc.

1. Architect's Representative: L. Mark Loudermilk, AIA.

2. Contact Email: [email protected].

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have

prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Civil Engineering:

a. Catlin Engineers and Scientists.

b. Contact: Galen M. Jamison, PE. [email protected].





SUMMARY 011000 - 2

2. Structural Engineering:

a. Andrew Consulting Engineers, PC

b. Contact: Neal Andrew, PE [email protected]

3. Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing Engineering:

a. CBHF Engineers, PLLC

b. Electrical Contact: Jason P. Famiglietti, PE [email protected]

c. Mechanical Contact: David M. Hahn. PE [email protected]

E. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Architect will be used for purposes of

managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using

the Project Web site.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The project consists of the construction of approximately 13,708 sf of new building and

related site work for the City of Wilmington Fire Department – Fire Station #5. The

project will include:

a. Site – Approximately 1.10 acres total land area includes: earthwork; utilities;

parking; entrances; pedestrian and vehicular paving; stormwater structures; and

landscaping. Site lighting, other than exterior building lighting, to be provided by

Duke Progress Energy.

b. Building – ground supported reinforced concrete foundations; reinforced concrete

slab on grade; structural metal studs and concrete block wall construction; brick

and stone veneer; cast stone trim; cementitious wall panels; aluminum windows

and storefront; metal and membrane roofing; rigid and batt insulation; interior

metal studs; gypsum wallboard; acoustic panel ceilings; solid wood doors; hollow

metal frames; door hardware; ceramic tile; carpet; paint; casework; lockers;

residential appliances and fire fighter specialties. Building systems utilities:

underground electric service; panelboards; interior and exterior lighting;

switches/receptacles; diesel-fueled engine-generator; automatic power transfer

switch; automatic fire detection and alarm system; empty conduit for voice, data,

video and security systems; high-efficiency split system heat pumps; outside air

ventilation/energy recovery units; metal and flexible insulated air distribution

ducts; dampers; air devices; automatic temperature controls; domestic hot and cold

water; plumbing fixtures and fittings; sanitary and storm sewer; and automatic fire

extinguishment system. All utilities connected to municipal services.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.





SUMMARY 011000 - 3

1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling,

storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Ice Machine in Room 143.

2. Work Bench in Room 142.

3. Air Compressor in Room 139.

4. Refrigerators in Room 108.

5. Microwave Ovens in Room 108.

6. Televisions in various rooms.

7. Computer Monitors in various rooms.

8. Clothes Washer/Dryer in Room 120.

9. Speaker system located throughout the building.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during

construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform

work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of

7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site

is not permitted.

E. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of

Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of

the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.

2. Unit-cost allowances.

3. Quantity allowances.

4. Contingency allowances.

5. Testing and inspecting allowances.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices, including adjustment

of quantity allowances when applicable.

2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances

for field testing by an independent testing agency.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Allowance is a quantity of work or dollar amount established in lieu of additional requirements,

used to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be

provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

1.4 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final

selection, or purchase and delivery, of each product or system described by an allowance must

be completed by the Owner to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.

Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances in the form

specified for Change Orders.



1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for

use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of

allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of

the Work.

1.7 LUMP-SUM, UNIT-COST AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner

or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include [taxes, ]freight[,] and delivery to

Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor,

installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by

Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum

and not part of the allowance.

1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based

on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement

of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting

losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the

allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of

overhead costs and other markups.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of Work, if any, claimed in Change Orders

related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent

quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance

described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's

handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost

amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of Work has changed from

what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-

priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return

damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and

installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with

related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No. 1: Unit-Cost Allowance: Include the sum of $350.00 per thousand for face brick

as specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" and as shown on Drawings.

B. Allowance No. 2: Unit-Cost Allowance: Include the sum of $25.00 per cubic yard for

unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off-site and replacement with satisfactory soil

material from off-site, as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

C. Allowance No. 3: Unit-Cost Allowance: Include the sum of $300 per door for door hardware as

specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

D. Allowance No. 4: Lump Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $1,000.00 for interior panel

signage.

E. Allowance No. 5: Lump Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $8,000 for emergency generator

platform and stairs.



UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.


1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and

handling Change Orders.

2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion

of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the

scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are

increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,

applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires

establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified

in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use

of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an

independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections

referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.



UNIT PRICES 012200 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No. 2 - Excavation and removal of unsuitable material from site with furnishing and

placing select backfill including compaction and all other incidental work. Measurement and

payment will be made for quantities actually excavated, removed, furnished and placed.

Unsuitable soil will be defined by the testing agency as specified in Section 312000 Earth

Moving. Units – Cubic Yards (CY).

B. Unit Price No. 3 – Undercutting and Backfilling Unsuitable Subgrade Soils: Excavate below

bottom of concrete footings to remove Unsuitable Soil and dispose of offsite; Replace with #57

or #67 Stone per Section 312000 or replace with Controlled Low-Strength (Flowable Fill)

Material per Section 312000. Units – Cubic Yards (CY).



ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined

in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the

Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be

completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described

in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the

Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work

of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part

of alternate.

B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work

described under each alternate.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1 : Sectional Overhead Doors.

1. Base Bid: Install folding doors at all apparatus bays per Section 083513.

2. Alternate: Install sectional overhead doors at north side apparatus bays per Section

083613.



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.

2. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or

unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not

required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to

Contractor or Owner.


A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or

fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title

and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate

contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.

Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,



durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific

features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work

specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays

in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible

with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within

15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or

documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility

tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved

substitutions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related

submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect

will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified

product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing

Contract modifications.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,

"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop

work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after

receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the

Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data

to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an

extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and

Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail" or forms acceptable to Architect.



B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to

substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the

Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed

change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with

attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C,

"Proposal Worksheet Detail" or form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for

preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of

allowances.

B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for

preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope

of unit-price work.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order

for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on

AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a

change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the

Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive.



1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Requests for Information (RFIs).

4. Project Web site.

5. Project meetings.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

4. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with

Owner's Commissioning Authority.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or

clarifications of the Contract Documents.


A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key

personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project

site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone



numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide

names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of

individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office and by each

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at

meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of

the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of

temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that

are designated as Owner's property.



1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is

required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than

one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed

data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.

Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of

various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings

by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the

information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before

submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated

replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,

valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.

g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance

requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed

resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations

will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and

mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of

visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan

drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical

and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to

accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict

between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans

and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical

equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door

floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and

similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:



a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including

insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access

doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler

heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's

responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared

in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform

Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the

following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating

system as original Drawings.

2. File Preparation Format: DWG, Version 2012, operating in Microsoft Windows

operating system.

3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File

(PDF) format.

4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in

preparing coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data files as they relate to Drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2012 format.

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of

AIA Document C106.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.



2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Project number.

3. Date.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of Architect.

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

7. RFI subject.

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

12. Contractor's signature.

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items

needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or software-generated form with substantially the same

content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.

Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect

after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."



a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI

response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B or software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor

disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use Architect's Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication

and documentation until Final Completion.

B. Architect will provide the following Project Web site software packages under their current

published licensing agreements:

1. Newforma, Inc. Newforma Project Center.

C. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties granted access by Contractor to Project Web site

shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled

meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,

including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after

execution of the Agreement.



1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,

Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;

suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the

conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to

the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Lines of communications.

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

g. Procedures for RFIs.

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

k. Submittal procedures.

l. LEED requirements.

m. Preparation of record documents.

n. Use of the premises.

o. Work restrictions.

p. Working hours.

q. Owner's occupancy requirements.

r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

s. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

u. Construction waste management and recycling.

v. Parking availability.

w. Office, work, and storage areas.

x. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

y. First aid.

z. Security.

aa. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting

minutes.

C. LEED Coordination Conference: Owner will schedule and conduct a LEED coordination

conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner Architect, and

Contractor.


Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent and LEED coordinator;

major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference.

Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude

matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect meeting requirements for LEED

certification, including the following:



a. LEED Project Checklist.

b. General requirements for LEED-related procurement and documentation.

c. Project closeout requirements and LEED certification procedures.

d. Role of LEED coordinator.

e. Construction waste management.

f. Construction operations and LEED requirements and restrictions.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting

minutes.

D. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise

Architect and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. LEED requirements.

i. Review of mockups.

j. Possible conflicts.

k. Compatibility requirements.

l. Time schedules.

m. Weather limitations.

n. Manufacturer's written instructions.

o. Warranty requirements.

p. Compatibility of materials.

q. Acceptability of substrates.

r. Temporary facilities and controls.

s. Space and access limitations.

t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

u. Testing and inspecting requirements.

v. Installation procedures.

w. Coordination with other work.

x. Required performance results.

y. Protection of adjacent work.

z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties

requiring information.



5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

E. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time

convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of

Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout.


Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;

suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the

meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the

Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,

including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.

c. Submittal of written warranties.

d. Requirements for completing LEED documentation.

e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.

f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.

g. Requirements for demonstration and training.

h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.

j. Submittal procedures.

k. Coordination of separate contracts.

l. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.

m. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

F. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular and appropriate intervals, but not less

than monthly.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority

and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with

current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities

shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.



a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Status of LEED documentation.

5) Deliveries.

6) Off-site fabrication.

7) Access.

8) Site utilization.

9) Temporary facilities and controls.

10) Progress cleaning.

11) Quality and work standards.

12) Status of correction of deficient items.

13) Field observations.

14) Status of RFIs.

15) Status of proposal requests.

16) Pending changes.

17) Status of Change Orders.

18) Pending claims and disputes.

19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the

meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

G. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project

coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as

progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority

and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with

current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities

shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.

Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for

discussion as appropriate to status of Project.



a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of

schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction

schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure

commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions

are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed

within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each

coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or

recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the

following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to

others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule.

2. Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Construction schedule updating reports.

4. Daily construction reports.

5. Material location reports.

6. Site condition reports.

7. Special reports.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,

and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume

time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned

early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.

2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.



1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction

period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule

for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to

comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)

and date on label.

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

G. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

H. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

I. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

J. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and

reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of

Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.

3. Discuss constraints, including work stages and interim milestones.

4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.

5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.

6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.

7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.

8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies.

9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including

commissioning activities.

10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.

11. Review procedures for updating schedule.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and

reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of

final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless

specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities

in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in

Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times

in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch

list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and

as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.

3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner.

4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate

the earliest possible delivery date.



5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the

earliest possible delivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Environmental control.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the

Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards.

b. Submittals.

c. Purchases.

d. Mockups.

e. Fabrication.

f. Sample testing.

g. Deliveries.

h. Installation.

i. Tests and inspections.

j. Adjusting.

k. Curing.

l. Building flush-out.

m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of

the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be

sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion.

b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.

c. Permanent space enclosure.

d. Completion of mechanical installation.

e. Completion of electrical installation.

f. Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.

On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and

actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.

2. Unanswered Requests for Information.

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.

4. Notations on returned submittals.



5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days

behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by

which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working

hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by

which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has

been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within

seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of

each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90

days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash

requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the

Work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received

since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of

each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an

estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.

5. Material deliveries.

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow.

7. Accidents.

8. Meetings and significant decisions.

9. Unusual events (see special reports).

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

11. Meter readings and similar recordings.



12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

14. Change Orders received and implemented.

15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.

16. Services connected and disconnected.

17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of

materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials

previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on

and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project

site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and

the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute

copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project

site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain

of events, persons participating, and response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or

effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are

known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly

scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each

such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not

limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.



B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned

portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Section 018113.13 "Sustainable Design Requirements" for submitting documentation

related to LEED.

5. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for submitting documentation

related to commissioning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual

Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with

requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification

Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and

from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet

protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within

which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems

used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent

fixed-layout document format.




A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making

corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and

reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required

to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead

time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's

construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing

for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be

provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract

Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in

AutoCAD 2012.

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA C106.

d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:

1) Floor plans.

2) Reflected ceiling plans.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.



1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the

Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of

the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as

initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed

by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., FS3-061000.01).

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,

FS3-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval

markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,

containing the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.



g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.

i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

s. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file

metadata:

a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

c. Manufacturer name.

d. Product name.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested

by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract

Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information

as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

4. Submittals will be reviewed no more than twice at the Owner's expense. All subsequent

reviews will be performed at times convenient to the Designer and at the Contractor's

expense, based on the Designer's then prevailing rates including all direct and indirect

costs and fees. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all such fees invoiced to the

Owner by the Designer.

5. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining Designer's

review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the Contract Time.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.



I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification

Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an

electronic Project record document file.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless

submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.



1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and

identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's

property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of



color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing

and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one sets of Samples. Mark up and retain one returned

Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to

be demonstrated.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the

following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract

Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.

3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100

"Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200

"Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with

requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified

in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

L. LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 018113.13 "Sustainable

Design Requirements - LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations."

M. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact

information of architects and owners, and other information specified.



N. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and

personnel certified.

O. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

P. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

Q. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

U. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

V. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.



X. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests

performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,

for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for

calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit PDF electronic file, signed and sealed by the responsible design

professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or

certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700

"Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and

will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.



B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to

appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial

submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without

action.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality

control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections

may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not

limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract

enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to

verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved

mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.



1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from

the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and

subassemblies.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before

products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance

with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or

that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of


1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply

with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.




A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and

size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before

starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.

4. Identification of applicable standards.

5. Identification of test and inspection methods.

6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of Award,

and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to

Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be

used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate

with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and

experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures

similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.



1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through

review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible

for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work

requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and

inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the

"Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including

tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and

inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into

compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved

mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of

approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or

defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with

requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.



B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in

other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed



for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and

extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation

of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the

following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with

performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will

perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do

not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning

Authority, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report



whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract

Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup. Coordinate installation of

exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual

Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to

perform.

2. These services will be hired directly by the owner.

3. Any costs for a testing inspector having to revisit the site, retesting and/or re-inspecting

construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the

Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that

the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor

by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.



3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal

Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's

services include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and

conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed

portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and

Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and

inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or

deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the

following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.



6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with

Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing

agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and

inspections are required.

1.11 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests

and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as

follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities

and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control

service to Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to


4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,

which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.



4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and

inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working

hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas

and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as

possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in

Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the

Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control

performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to

dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on

which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.


REFERENCES 014200 - 2

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's

"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'

"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This

information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.

2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.

3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov.

4. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.

5. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.

6. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

7. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.

8. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.

9. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.




http://www.usace.army.mil/

http://www.cpsc.gov/

http://www.nist.gov/

http://www.energy.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.eetd.lbl.gov/

http://www.osha.gov/


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

2. See civil drawings for specifications regarding asphalt and concrete paving.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in

the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and

facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction

operations.

C. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all

entities for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having

jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention

program.

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and

construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water

absorption or water damage.



2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating

water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,

plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these

operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to

permit installation of finish materials.

E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the

dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time

frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to

be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.

4. Waste handling procedures.

5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric

fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line

posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-

spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.



2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and

construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other

Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan

racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide

electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one

receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square

tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet.

4. Coffee machine and supplies.

5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F.

6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location

and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille

in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in

Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the

Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for

construction.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of

construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,

number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to

level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment

in a condition acceptable to Owner.

G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination

for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.



H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all

construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.

c. Contractor's home office.

d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.

e. Architect's office.

f. Engineers' offices.

g. Owner's office.

h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when

away from field office.

I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office

adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain

electronic communications.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction

area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.

Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial

Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to

Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas

adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within

construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as

required to minimize dust.

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas

in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads

and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas,

within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and

paved areas.



2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas

according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,

regrading, proof-rolling, compacting, and testing.

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until

immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course

pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt

Paving."

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or

adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.

2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste

from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and

other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be

removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible

air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."



C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site

Clearing."

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of

stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639 "Temporary

Tree and Plant Protection."

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial

Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure

fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by

entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined

sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of

construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and

similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and

as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar

activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate

temporary enclosures.

L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with

NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.



4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning

sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.

Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document

visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject

to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.

3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

4. Remove standing water from decks.

5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full

enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration

of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with

high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.

4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.

5. Do not install material that is wet.

6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.

7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building

enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.

3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and

gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and

remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during

construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of

exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture

levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured

moisture level within 48 hours.



3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated

results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,

when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial

Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been

delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed

surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration

into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove

soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove

materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and

other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace

street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities

having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in

Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in

Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on

products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.

2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.

3. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product

literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new

products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or

exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or

model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,

function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other

characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers

named in the specification.




A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification

Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable

product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional

information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if

previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and

to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.



C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for

submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.



3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make

selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or

approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"

Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for

Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be

considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers

and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be

considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed

product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with

requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience

will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed

manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's

product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or

indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics

that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable

Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named

manufacturers.



C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's

decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution

Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by

Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with

requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's

product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable

product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,

Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,

that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,

and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the

Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. Installation of the Work.

4. Cutting and patching.

5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

6. Progress cleaning.

7. Starting and adjusting.

8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and

levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after

installation of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of

improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.



E. Final Property Survey: Submit 2 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying

services of the kind indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent

possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of

in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting

the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,

and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.



C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the

Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding

with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,

move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility

appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control

of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site.

3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions.

4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.

7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log

available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control

points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points

promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to

Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base

replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having

jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide

temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction

to its original condition.

D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing

significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by

land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned

as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing

improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,

and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.



1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction

items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated

requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size

and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size

and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.



B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not

to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as

practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching

and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and

intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final



paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional

coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors

are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials

down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."



H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in

Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

1. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

2. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper

operation without binding.

3. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and

safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.

2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and

removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes

packaging.

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or

deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to

Proceed.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful

waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,

signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan

during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for

implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management

procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal

return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review

plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and

used facilities.

1. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust

and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove

waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of

accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,

but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.

2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with

Owner's Commissioning Authority.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in

other Sections.



1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and

corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why

the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below

that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction

permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.

Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project

record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction

photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar

final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,

workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar

documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,

spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by

Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item

and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature

for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below

that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in

Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.



10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and

tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after

inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items

identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final

completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment

Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed

and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been

completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage

complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of

10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On

receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection

or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate

will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by

construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if

necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.



b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project

Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone

number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty

and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling

navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous

to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not

applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum

allowable VOC levels.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution

regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured

surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign

substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.

Provide written report on completion of cleaning.



p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities

and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of


B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective

parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly

adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,

provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified

condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other

damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including

mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and

identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede

operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and

noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for

new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation

and maintenance manuals.

2. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation

of data into operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed

manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are

acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions

and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.

Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.



a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable

item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance

directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. One paper copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title

pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return one copy.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether

general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.

Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's

comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of

Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing

demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance

data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired

information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building

Systems."



2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name and contact information for Contractor.

6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.

7. Name and contact information for Architect.

8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.

9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.

10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic

PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable

file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names

used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and

subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so

that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily

navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening

file.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.



2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and

equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.



5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,

and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation

or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.



E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or

schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine

maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.



F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local

sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data

applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or

systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.



1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839

"Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,


1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.

2) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots.

3) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of

prints.

2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

c. Final Submittal:



1) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file

plots.

2) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information

were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,

including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop

Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide

information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below first floor.

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Duct size and routing.

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

j. Changes made following Architect's written orders.

k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

m. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.



3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use

personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record

prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted

from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial

Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set

of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: DWG, Version 2012, Microsoft Windows operating system, or annotated PDF

electronic file with comment function enabled.

2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.

4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information.

a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of

Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate

layers.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet

identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."

d. Name of Architect.


2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.



B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project

record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they

occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record

documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,

dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record

documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,


1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Demonstration and training video recordings.

B. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time

spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for

time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. See requirements in

Section 012200 "Unit Prices."


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,

including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of

instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and

outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and

training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording

of live instructional module.

2. Any manufacturer-produced videos must be reviewed as a group with operational

personnel and the Contractor in case questions arise. Do not simply turn into the owner.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of

instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and

documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of

each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:



a. Name of Project.

b. Name and address of videographer.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.


f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label

information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to

corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording

on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared

in same PDF file format required for operation and maintenance manuals specified in

Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and

maintenance procedures and training.

B. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data

have been reviewed and approved by Architect.

1.7 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules

for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification

Sections.



B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a

description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each

module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or

component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.

e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Systems and equipment operation manuals.

c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

d. Product maintenance manuals.

e. Project Record Documents.

f. Identification systems.

g. Warranties and bonds.

h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.



5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning.

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

1.8 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training

module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with

requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

1.9 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational

requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.



1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven days'

advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully

operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation

and maintenance data submittals.

D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial

training use.

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training

video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and

demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective

and lesson outline.

B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by

a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in

full HD mode.

1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to Project Manual

table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based on name of equipment generally described in video

segment, as identified in Project specifications.

4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for

inclusion on the equipment demonstration and training recording that describes the

following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project

Manual table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer.

b. Business address.

c. Business phone number.

d. Point of contact.

e. Email address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to

adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.

b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project

Manual table of contents.

c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,

stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon

commencement of new filming segment.



D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment

markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video

recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from

videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Pre-produced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training

modules in same format as recordings of live training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)



GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 1

SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Commissioning Plan is included as an attachment to this specification section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning (Cx)

without regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations: The following are common abbreviations used in the commissioning

specifications and in the Commissioning Plan:

A/E Architect and Engineer of Record

BoD Basis of Design

Cx Commissioning

CxA Commissioning Authority or Agent

Cx Plan Commissioning Plan Document

FPT Functional Performance Testing

GC General Contractor

OPM Owner’s Project Manager

OPR Owner’s Project Requirements

PFC Pre-functional Checklists

TAB Test, Adjust and Balance

B. Definitions: The following are common terms used during the commissioning process and in

the commissioning specifications and in the Commissioning Plan:

1. Acceptance Phase: Phase of construction after start-up and initial checkout when

functional performance testing occurs.

2. Approval: Acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed

and is functioning in the tested modes according to the Contract Documents.

3. Architect/Engineer (A/E): The prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who

comprise the design team, generally the HVAC mechanical designer/engineer and the

electrical designer/engineer.

4. Basis of Design (BoD): The basis of design, also known as the design narrative. A

document that records the concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used

to meet the OPR and satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and

guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual

items that support the design process.



5. Commissioning Authority or Agent (CxA): The entity identified by the owner who leads,

plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the

commissioning process.

6. Commissioning Issues Log: formal and ongoing records of concerns - and their resolution

- that have been raised by members of the commissioning team during the course of the


7. Commissioning Plan: A document, developed before or after bidding, that provides the

organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the


8. Control System: The central Building Automation System (BAS).

9. Data Logging: The monitoring and recording of flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of

equipment using stand-alone data loggers separate from the control systems.

10. Deferred Functional Tests: Performance tests that are performed later, after project

acceptance, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other

site conditions that disallow the test from being performed during the construction or

acceptance phases.

11. Deficiency: A condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of

equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents.

12. Factory Testing: The certified testing of equipment in accordance with the Contract

Documents on-site or at the factory by authorized factory personnel with an Owner’s

representative present.

13. Functional Performance Test (FPT): Test of the dynamic function and operation of

equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods.

Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under

full operation. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or

heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air

temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control

system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the

sequences state. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in a

sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is

usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor. FPTs are performed after pre-

functional checklists and start-up are complete.

14. Indirect Indicators: Indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control

system screen reporting a damper to be 100% closed.

15. Manual Test: Using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct

observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over

time to make the “observation”).

16. Monitoring: The recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of

equipment operation using data loggers or the trending capabilities of control systems.

17. Non-Compliance: See Deficiency.

18. Non-Conformance: See Deficiency.

19. Non-Productive Time: Time spent by the CxA on-site for the purpose of witnessing

procedures and/or testing (static pressure testing, hydronic flushing/purging procedures,

functional performance tests, etc.) scheduled by the contractor, where progress is found

to be incomplete thus preventing the procedure and/or testing from occurring, and

requiring the CxA to return to the project site at a later date to observe the same

procedure. Non-productive time does not include time spent during FPT waiting for the

contractor to correct minor issues such as sensor calibration, set-point adjustments, or

other issues that arise during FPT that allow the procedure and/or testing to continue with

minor delays, nor does it include retesting a portion of the completed FPT to verify an

issue was resolved.



20. Over-ridden Value: Writing over a sensor value in the equipment’s control programming

inputs to observe the response of the equipment’s operation (e.g., changing the outside air

temperature value from 50°F to 75°F to verify economizer operation). See Simulated

Signal.

21. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR): A written document that details the functional

requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. This

includes project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks,

success criteria, and supporting information.

22. Pre-functional Checklist (PFC): A form, provided by the CxA, used by the installing

contractor to verify that appropriate components are on-site, correctly installed, started-up

and ready for functional performance testing. Pre-functional checklists are primarily

static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation.

23. Sampling: Functional testing of a portion of the total number of identical or near identical

pieces of equipment.

24. Seasonal Performance Tests: FPTs that are deferred until the system(s) will experience

conditions closer to their design conditions based on weather conditions.

25. Simulated Condition: Condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a

system.

26. Simulated Signal: Disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to simulate a

sensor value for the purpose of testing a full range of conditions.

27. Start-up: The initial starting or activating of dynamic equipment, including completing

pre-functional checklists.

28. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together

or separately, they shall mean “as-built” systems, subsystems, equipment, and

components.

29. Test Procedure: A step-by-step process which must be executed to fulfill the test

requirements. The test procedures are developed by the CxA.

30. Test Requirements: The requirements specifying what modes of functions, etc. shall be

tested. The test requirements are not the detailed test procedures.

31. Trending: Generating a point history of building system performance using the building

automation system or other methods.

1.4 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

A. Mechanical (HVAC)

1. Pumps (heating supply, boiler circulating)

2. Heat pump indoor air handling units

3. Heat pump outdoor units

4. Roof ventilator fans

5. Radiant floor heating system

6. Energy recovery ventilator

7. Vehicle exhaust system

8. Variable refrigerant flow branch circuit controllers

9. Kitchen exhaust hood

B. Building Automation System (HVAC Controls)

1. Sequences of operation on all HVAC equipment

2. Graphics and interface to web access

3. Sensor calibrations – 25% sample



4. Interface to fire alarm system

C. Plumbing Systems

D. Domestic water heating system

1. Water heaters (gas, solar)

2. Circulation pumps

3. Thermostatic mixing valves

E. Electrical Systems

1. Lighting controls

F. Metering

1. Electric meter interface to BAS controls

2. Gas meter interface to BAS controls

3. Water meter interface to BAS controls

1.5 COMMISSIONING PLAN – (ATTACHED)

A. Introduction

1. Definition of building commissioning

2. Commissioning goal

3. Purpose of the Commissioning Plan

B. Roles and Responsibilities of the Commissioning Team

1. Team member responsibilities

C. The Commissioning Process

1. Meetings

2. Communications

3. Design review

4. Site observations

5. System start-up

6. Point-to-point

7. Functional performance testing

8. Commissioning reporting and deficiency tracking

9. Commissioning Final Report

D. Systems to be Commissioned

1. Mechanical/HVAC

2. HVAC controls

3. Electrical

4. Plumbing

5. Metering



E. Appendices

1. Preliminary commissioning activity durations

2. Sample pre-functional checklists

3. Sample functional performance tests

1.6 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and required

functional performance testing shall be provided by the contractor installing the equipment

being tested. Two-way radios shall be provided by the GC.

B. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system

performance with the tolerances specified in the Contract Documents. All equipment shall be

calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended requirements. Calibration tags shall be

affixed or certificates readily available. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum

requirements apply:

1. All test instruments shall have had a certified calibration within the last 12 months.

2. Pressure testing equipment and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration

within the past year to accuracy double that of the instrument being tested/calibrated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MEETINGS

A. The CxA will schedule, plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting with the Project

commissioning team. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by the CxA. Information

gathered from this meeting will allow the CxA to revise the draft Commissioning Plan to its

“final” version, which will also be distributed to all parties.

B. Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CxA as construction progresses. The CxA

will plan the meetings with the appropriate contractors to cover coordination and deficiency

resolution. The meetings will generally be held monthly, until the final 4 months of construction

when they may be held as frequently as once per week.

3.2 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS, START-UP AND INITIAL CHECKOUT

A. Four weeks prior to startup, the GC shall schedule installing contractors and vendors for

equipment startup and checkout and coordinate with the CxA. The performance of the pre-

functional checklists, startup and checkout are directed and executed by the contractors or

vendors.

B. The CxA may observe the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are

multiple units (in which case a sampling strategy may be used).



C. For lower-level components of equipment (e.g., fan-coil units, sensors, controllers), the CxA

may observe a sampling of the pre-functional and start-up procedures.

D. The installing contractors and vendors shall execute start-up and provide the CxA with a signed

and dated copy of the completed start-up and pre-functional tests and checklists.

E. Only individuals that have witnessed that a line item task on the pre-functional checklist was

actually performed shall initial or check that item off.

F. Clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and pre-functional procedures that were

not completed successfully. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies are provided

to the CxA within a week of test completion.

G. The installing contractor shall correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists

and tests in a timely manner. The GC shall notify the CxA as soon as outstanding items have

been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the

original non-compliance report.

H. Deficient items identified during pre-functional testing and initial start-up not corrected, which

later cause deficiencies or delays during functional testing, will result in back charges to the GC

for the CxA time to perform any retesting. The installing contractor shall be responsible for

performing retests of deficient pre-functional or functional tests at its own cost.

3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing or by

monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log

capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The CxA may substitute specified methods or

require an additional method to be executed. The CxA will determine which method is most

appropriate for tests that do not have a method specified.

B. Simulating conditions (not by an overwritten value) shall be allowed, though timing the testing

to experience actual conditions is encouraged wherever practical.

C. Overwriting sensor values to simulate a condition, such as overwriting the outside air

temperature, shall be permitted when necessary. Before simulating conditions or overwriting

values, sensors, transducers and devices shall have been calibrated.

D. Using a signal generator, which creates a simulated signal to test and calibrate transducers and

DDC constants, is generally recommended over using the sensor to act as the signal generator

via simulated conditions or overwritten values.

E. Altering set-points to test a sequence is acceptable.

F. Indirect indicators for responses or performance shall be allowed only after visually and directly

verifying and documenting that the indirect readings through the control system represent actual

conditions and responses.

G. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual conditions as

close as is practically possible. The installing contractor is responsible for returning all

temporary building system modifications to conditions required by the Contract Documents.



H. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be

functionally tested using a sampling strategy. A small size or capacity difference alone does not

constitute a difference.

I. The GC shall provide a minimum of two weeks’ notice to the CxA regarding its completion

schedule for the pre-functional checklists and startup of all equipment and systems. The CxA

will schedule functional tests through the GC. The CxA shall coordinate, witness, and document

the functional testing of all equipment and systems. The installing contractors shall execute the

tests.

J. Functional testing is conducted after pre-functional testing and startup has been satisfactorily

completed. The control system shall be sufficiently tested and approved by the installing

contractor before it is used for TAB or to verify performance of other components or systems.

The air balancing and water balancing is completed and debugged before functional testing of

air-related or water-related equipment or systems.

K. Items identified as deficient during pre-functional testing and initial start-up, but not corrected,

that later cause deficiencies or delays during functional testing, will result in back charges to the

GC for the CxA time to perform any retesting. The installing contractor shall be responsible for

performing retests of deficient pre-functional or functional tests at its own cost.

3.4 SAMPLING

A. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be

functionally tested using a sampling strategy. Significant application differences and significant

sequence of operation differences in otherwise identical equipment invalidates their common

identity. A small size or capacity difference, alone, does not constitute a difference.

B. Sampling by contractors is not permitted during pre-functional checklist execution unless

otherwise permitted by the CxA.

C. A common sampling strategy is the “xx% Sampling-yy% Failure Rule” where “xx = the percent

of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample” and “yy = the percent of the

sample that if failing, will require another sample to be tested.

D. An example of the “xx% Sampling-yy% Failure Rule” describing a 30% Sampling-10% Failure

Rule:

1. Randomly test at least 25% (xx) of each group of identical equipment. In no case test less

than three units in each group. This 25%, or three, constitute the “first sample.”

2. If 10% (yy) of the units in the first sample fail the functional performance tests, test

another 25% of the group (the second sample).

3. If 10% of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining units in the whole group.

4. If at any point, frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more

troubleshooting than verification, the CxA may stop the testing and require the installing

contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units, prior to

continuing with functionally testing the remaining units.



3.5 DEFERRED TESTING

A. Any check or test that cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy

condition, or deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon

Owner approval.

3.6 COST OF NON-PRODUCTIVE TIME

A. The cost for non-productive time, as defined in Section 019113 Part 1.3.B, shall be the

responsibility of the installing contractor.

1. Non-productive time will be charged based on time on-site from arrival to departure, plus

30 minutes round trip travel time from the CxA’s office to the project site, at a rate of

$145 per hour.

2. Non-productive time will be charged by the CxA directly to the Owner.

3. The Owner will back charge the CxA’s invoice for non-productive time to the GC.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel plates with integral anchorage.

2. Steel plates with anchor rods.


1. Section 042000 “Unit Masonry” for masonry that is anchored to or that receives concrete

items.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for steel plates with anchor rods and steel

plates with integral anchorage built into concrete construction.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;

materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: Submit properties and specified requirements of mixtures for each class of

concrete including:

1. Mixture Identification by class.

2. Specified compressive strength, ƒ΄c, that is applicable for the class.

3. Specified exposure class.

4. Documentation of strength test records of similar class of concrete used to establish

standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318, when test records exist.

5. Required average compressive strength, ƒ΄cr, for each class of concrete.



6. Documentation of ƒ΄cr of proposed mixture(s) and test age.

7. Strength of concrete at other ages for stages of construction, when specified.

8. w/cm of proposed concrete mixtures, when specified.

9. Intended placement method.

10. Slump or slump flow.

11. Air content of concrete assigned to Exposure Category F.

12. Density, when specified.

13. Equilibrium density and density of fresh concrete, when specified for lightweight

concrete.

14. Documentation supporting other specified requirements of concrete mixtures.

15. Nominal maximum aggregate size or Size number.

16. Type and information about the ingredient materials proposed for use including:

a. Cementitious Materials.

b. Aggregates.

c. Admixtures.

d. Water.

C. Submit field or laboratory test records used to document that proposed mixture will achieve the

required average compressive strength and other specified requirements for each class of

concrete.

1. Field test records for concrete strength test records must be from concrete supplied from

the same production facilities proposed for Work. Test data shall be from concrete

mixtures containing similar materials proposed for Work.

2. Strength test records for establishing a standard deviation for each class of concrete or for

documenting the required average strength for Work shall not be greater than 24 months

old and shall be collected over a period not less than 45 days.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Indicate dimensions and spacing of dowels.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Aggregates.

3. Mixing water.

4. Admixtures.

5. Form materials and form-release agents.

6. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

7. Curing compounds.

8. Vapor retarders.



9. Semirigid joint filler.

10. Joint-filler strips.

C. Quality Control Plan: For installer and manufacturer.

1. Include curing methods, wet, cold, and hot weather plans.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of items that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages that are to be embedded in

masonry.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified

Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities."

2. Quality Control personnel with responsibility for concrete mixtures certified as an

NRMCA Concrete Technologist Level 2, or equivalent.

C. Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

2. ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

3. ACI 318 (ACI 318M).

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.



C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed, of size indicated on

the Drawings.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Diamond Shaped Plate Dowels:

1. Manufacturer: PNA Construction Technologies

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

3. Material:

a. ASTM A 36/A 36M.for plates .375 inch (9.5 mm) and smaller.

b. ASTM A 108 for plates larger than .375 inch (9.5 mm).

4. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M in truck bays.

B. Tapered Plate Dowels:

1. Manufacturer: PNA Construction Technologies

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

3. Material: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

4. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M in truck bays.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Bar supports and their spacing shall

conform to the recommendations in Chapter 3 of CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

1. Precast concrete supports: Shall have a compressive strength equal to or greater than

specified compressive strength of concrete being placed.

D. Tie wire: Wire shall be 16.5 gauge or heavier, black annealed.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:

1. Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 150, ASTM C 1157 or ASTM C595.

2. Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolan: ASTM C 618.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989.

4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Provide aggregates from a single source.



1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As Indicated in “2.10 Concrete Mixtures.”

2. Alkali Silica Reactivity: Aggregate shall be considered non-reactive with a documented

satisfactory service record for a minimum ten year period used in concrete with similar

cementitious materials or with an alkali (Na2O eq.) content in concrete equal or higher

than that in the proposed mixture. In the absence of service record the aggregate shall be

tested and will be considered non-reactive if it passes one of the following two

requirements – ASTM C 1260 14-day expansion less than or equal to 0.10% or ASTM C

1293 1-year expansion less than or equal to 0.040%. For aggregate that do not meet these

criteria, mitigation measures shall apply in accordance with Concrete Mixtures.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and

that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened

concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Air-Entraining: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

2. Water-Reducing, accelerating and retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M.

3. Admixtures for flowing concrete: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.

4. Admixtures for corrosion inhibition: ASTM C 1582.

5. Admixtures with no standard (ASTM or other) designation shall be used with the

permission of the engineer of record when its use for specific properties is required.

D. Water: ASTM C 1602

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 15 mils (.38 mm) thick. . Include

manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: ASTM C 1602.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 4819 Type II; Closed-cell polyethylene

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a

Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.



2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Design

mixtures shall meet the following requirements:

Class† Location

Nominal

Max.

Aggregate

Size

Exposure

Classes

f’c,

psi Additional Requirements

Foundations As indicated 1-1/2 inch

(37.5 mm)

F0, S0,

P0,C0 4,000 NA

Slab Type 1 Interior slabs 1-1/2 inch

(37.5 mm)

F0, S0,

P0,C0 3,500

Minimum Cementitious material

content: 470 lb/yd3

Maximum w/cm: .5

Slab Type 2 Exterior Slabs 1-1/2 inch

(37.5 mm)

F1, S0,

P0,C0 4,500


content: 470 lb/yd3,

Maximum w/cm: .45,

Air content: 4.5%

Slab Type 3 Slab-on-deck 1 inch (25

mm)

F0, S0,

P0,C0 3,500


content: 470 lb/yd3

Maximum w/cm: .5

Lintels As indicated 1-1/2 inch

(37.5 mm)

F0, S0,

P0,C0 4,000 NA

†See ACI 301 Chapter 4.2 for design requirements for performance and Exposure Class

B. Contractor is responsible for preparation of design mixtures for each class of concrete used in

construction.

C. The contractor shall coordinate to establish properties of the fresh concrete to facilitate

placement and finishing with reduced potential for segregation and bleeding. Factors shall

include but are not limited to slump or slump flow, setting time, method of placement, rate of

placement, hot and cold weather placement, curing, and concrete temperature.

D. Contractor shall indicate reportable changes in sources of materials and quantities when such

changes are necessary to ensure constructability, performance of concrete and compliance with

this specification.

E. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Alkali silica reactivity: For concrete that will be moist in service and when indicated that the

aggregate source used needs to include mitigative measures, submit documentation

demonstrating that the proposed cementitious materials used with the aggregates by ASTM C

1567 tests with an expansion after 14 days of exposure less than or equal to 0.1%.

G. For members where control of curling or reduction in potential for cracking is required and as

indicated, submit data on the length change characteristics of the concrete mixture test in

accordance with ASTM C 157. Perform ASTM C 157 tests and submit data showing length

change not exceeding 0.05% after 7 days of moist curing followed by 28 days of air drying.



2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

B. Provide continuous reinforcement at corners and intersections of footings.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32

deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.2 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld

crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.



3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Engineer.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-

fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with early-entry dry-cut saw equipped with

shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints

into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and

before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch

(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Measure, batch mix, deliver, and provide delivery ticket for each batch of concrete in

accordance with ASTM C 94.

1. Water is permitted to be added to a batch of concrete at the project site before placement

provided that the amount of water added does not exceed the allowed amount indicated

on the delivery ticket. Water addition shall only be permitted before any portion of the

load is discharged. Samples for quality assurance and special inspections shall be

obtained after water addition and additional mixing in accordance with ASTM C 94.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit

concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.



2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301

(ACI 301M).

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of

concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration

to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and

other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits

on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface

irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where

indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform

color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing

process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.



3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-

floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch

(6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious

floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or

inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular

texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of

trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-

finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and

placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry

tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly

scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere

as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish

with Architect before application.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M)

for hot-weather protection during curing.



B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and

during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder

of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at

least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover

material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity

of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until

construction traffic has permanently ceased.



B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush

with top of joint after hardening.

3.10 CONCRETE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and

replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer’s approval.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections

as indicated in the Statement of Special Inspections.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Headed bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)

or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional

tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;

ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each

composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.



a. Cast and cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two specimens at 7 days

and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Engineer, concrete manufacturer,

and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall

contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of

concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design

compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive

breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency

may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with

ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Engineer.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.



PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 1

SECTION 034100 - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes precast structural concrete.


1. Section 042000 “Unit Masonry” for masonry that is anchored to or that receives precast

concrete items.



B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings,

support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement.

2. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units, including

connections at member ends and to adjoining construction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material certificates.

D. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

E. Source quality-control reports.




A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural

concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of

Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant Group C, Category C1 - Precast Concrete Products

(no prestressed reinforcement).

B. Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate

of Compliance, to erect Category S1 - Simple Structural Systems.

C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures, testing requirements, and quality-

control recommendations for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for

Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other

construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates,

instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design precast structural concrete units.

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and with design recommendations in

PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types

of precast structural concrete units indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand design

loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other

devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement

in place according to PCI MNL 116.



2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent.

2. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.

3. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement.

4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

5. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with

coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type

of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength

of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

required admixtures.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to

not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of

admixture.

2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, Grade 1010 through 1020, cold finished,

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of

PCI MNL 116.

C. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for

galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less

than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-

Paint 20.

D. Reinforcing Bar and Dowel Splicers: Reinforcing bar splicing system designed to develop

minimum 1.25 Fy of the reinforcing bars in both tension and compression, conforming to ACI

318. Splicing system shall be listed by the International Code Council (ICC). Splicing system

shall consist of one or more of the following:

1. Dowel Bar Splicers: Integral forged bar end, female-threaded, with nailing flange on one

bar and integral matching male threads on the other bar. Provide specially forged bar



ends, such that the cut male threads do not diminish the original bar cross section

dimension.

2. Taper threaded steel couplers, with matching taper threaded reinforcing bar ends.

3. Grout sleeve couplers.

E. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories

required to install precast structural concrete units.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.5 BEARING PADS

A. Provide bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator

for application.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand,

ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by

volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion

content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to

ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing

and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade A for drypack and

Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-

minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of

cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of

type, grade, and class to suit requirements.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified

precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by

ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixture by either laboratory trial batch or field

test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide

normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.



E. Water Absorption: Limit water absorption to 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume,

tested according to ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement.

F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of

placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116.

G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if characteristics

of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage

hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.

Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting

operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement

or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,

cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to

supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as required

to receive other construction and as indicated.

D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

E. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection

stresses and specified in-place loads.

F. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing,

transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

G. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from

forming in precast concrete units.

H. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by vibration without dislocating or damaging

reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air

voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116.

I. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

J. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with

permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or



permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that does

not show in finished structure.

K. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat

or by accelerated heat curing using live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until

compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on

performance or appearance of final product.

L. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements,

including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements

in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval.

2.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate precast structural concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each

finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product dimension tolerances as well as position

tolerances for cast-in items.

2.10 COMMERCIAL FINISHES

A. Grade B Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter with sand-

cement paste matching color of adjacent surfaces. Fill air holes greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in

width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in. (1300 sq. mm). Grind smooth form offsets or fins

larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repair surface blemishes due to holes or dents in molds.

Discoloration at form joints is permitted.

B. Apply roughened surface finish according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) to precast concrete units that

receive unit masonry after installation.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116 requirements

and ASTM C 1610/C 1610M, ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M, and

ASTM C 1712/C 1712M.

B. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with

requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range.

Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast

structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.



B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances.

Provide temporary structural framing, shoring, and bracing as required to maintain position,

stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are complete.

1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection

progresses.

2. Remove projecting lifting devices and use plastic patch caps or sand-cement grout to fill

voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when

recess is exposed.

C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as

otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon

as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of Architect.

E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to

precast, prestressed concrete units.

F. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M

for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent

loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

H. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections and joints and open spaces

at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. Retain

flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff

dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled.

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding

the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135.

B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method

recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections as

indicated in the Statement of Special Inspections.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect.



1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and

appearance of units have not been impaired.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and

uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between

original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20

feet (6 m).

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to

ASTM A 780/A 780M.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop

primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or when

repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete

surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment

to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's

written recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning

operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed

concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Building (common) brick.

3. Mortar and grout.

4. Steel reinforcing bars.

5. Masonry-joint reinforcement.

6. Ties and anchors.

7. Embedded flashing.

8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under this Section:

1. Cast-stone trim in unit masonry.

2. Steel lintels in unit masonry.

3. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.

4. Steel bearing plates supporting steel joists

5. Steel angles supporting steel deck.

6. Cavity wall insulation.

7. Post-installed anchors


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete lintels anchored to masonry

construction.

2. Section 034100 “Precast Structural Concrete” for precast concrete lintels anchored to

masonry construction.

3. Section 044313.16 "Adhered Stone Veneer" for stone veneer.

4. Section 047200 "Cast Stone" for cast stone trim.

5. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for steel built into masonry construction.

6. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation.

7. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for

furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

1.2 ALLOWANCES

A. Face brick is part of the Face Brick Allowance.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing

bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Hollow brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.

2. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project.

3. Weep holes and cavity vents.

4. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with

manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,

source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix

proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of

deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought

to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls

within specified tolerances.

c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

d. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area

compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.

3. Mortar admixtures.

4. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

6. Reinforcing bars.



7. Joint reinforcement.

8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.

D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and

mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,

mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to

TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and

equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

F. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for post-installed anchors.

H. Installer Qualifications & Procedures: Submit installer qualifications. Submit a letter of

procedure stating method of drilling, the product proposed for use, the complete installation

procedure, manufacturer training date, and a list of the personnel to be trained on anchor

installation.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup as shown on Drawings.

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.

b. Include metal studs, sheathing, sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment air

barrier, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in

exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.

c. Include CMU showing reinforcing, bond beams, bar positioners, bearing plate,

post-installed anchors, joint reinforcing, and control joints. Include a wall

intersection.

2. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.

3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities

of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such

deviations in writing.

B. Installer Qualifications: Post-installed anchors shall be installed by an installer with at least

three years of experience performing similar installations.



C. Installer Training for Post-Installed Anchors: Conduct a thorough training with the

manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative for the installer on the project. Training to

consist of a review of the complete installation process for drilled-in anchors, to include but not

limited to:

1. Hole drilling procedure

2. Hole preparation & cleaning technique

3. Adhesive injection technique & dispenser training / maintenance

4. Proof loading/torqueing

D. Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 530.1

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units

become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

D. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry

mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered

weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely

in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least

three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface.



2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost

or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in


1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days

after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source

from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Provide unit masonry that develops a net-area compressive strength, f’m of 1500 psi (10.3 MPa)

at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive

strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to


2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such

defects are exposed in the completed Work.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs

indicated.



2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces

of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Density Classification: Lightweight.

2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

3. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's

sample.

2.5 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide the following:

B. Concrete Lintels: Formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in

Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and with reinforcing bars indicated.

C. Precast Concrete Lintels: Precast concrete lintels complying with requirements in

Section 034100 “Precast Structural Concrete.”

D. Masonry Lintels: Built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching

adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as

indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.6 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and

color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose

unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces

finished.

B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Grade: SW.

2. Type: FBS.

3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to

ASTM C 67.

4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated

"not effloresced."

5. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 8 inches long.

6. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect.



2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-

weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color

indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing

no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use

in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of

satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

G. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime or

masonry cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and

containing no other ingredients.

1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected

from manufacturer's standard colors.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.

H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or

crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the

No. 16 sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar

of composition indicated.

K. Water: Potable.



2.8 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60

(Grade 420).

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-

mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars

indicated.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.

5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.

6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.

7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of side

rods.

E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, ladder design, with one side rod at each face shell of

backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a

maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and maximum vertical adjustment of 1-

1/4 inches (32 mm). Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at

least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

2.9 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into veneer but with at

least a 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that

comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors for Connecting to Cold-Formed Metal Framing and

Concrete:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100-lbf (445-N) load

in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or

developing play in excess of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).



2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-inch- (1.90-

mm-) thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

3. Fabricate wire ties from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire

unless otherwise indicated.

4. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the adjustable masonry-

veneer anchors specified.

5. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a rib-stiffened, sheet metal

anchor section with screw holes top and bottom, with a projecting vertical tab having a

slotted hole for inserting wire tie.

6. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a rib-stiffened, sheet metal

anchor section with screw holes top and bottom, with projecting tabs having holes for

inserting vertical legs of wire tie formed to fit anchor section.

7. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a sheet metal anchor section, 1-

1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 9 inches (229 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom

and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 5-1/2 inches (140 mm)

long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and base for inserting wire tie.

8. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a sheet metal anchor section, 1-

1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom

and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch (16 mm) wide by 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) long,

stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and base for inserting wire tie.

9. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured

with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 (4.83-mm) diameter by

length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads, and

with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800

hours according to ASTM B 117.

2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual", Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:

1. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by extending

flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by

bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch

to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

3. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal

flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches into wall with

hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on

upper surface of metal so that completed seam sheds water.

4. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2

inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

5. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and

out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch

and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

6. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

7. Solder metal items at corners.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:



1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,

adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated

polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.

2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.

3) Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.

4) GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products).

5) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.

6) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

7) Polyguard Products, Inc.

8) W. R. Meadows, Inc.

9) Williams Products, Inc.

10) Wire-Bond.

b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and

seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal

flashing.

3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal

flashing with a drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge.

4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.

D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal

Flashing and Trim."

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products

or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other

and to substrates.

F. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless steel bars 1/8 inch by 1 inch.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene

urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying

with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287,

Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in

masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.



C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I

(No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than

depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.

2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.

3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

4) Wire-Bond.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade

within the wall cavity.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.

b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc.

c. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.

d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

e. Mortar Net Solutions.

f. Wire-Bond.

2. Configuration: Provide one of the following:

a. Sheets or strips not less than 1/2" thick and installed to full height of cavity, with

additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of

cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.

2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without

discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by

cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.


following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a division of Sandell Construction Solutions.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.

c. PROSOCO, Inc.



2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise

indicated.

a. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or mortar cement mortar.

3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.

3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.

4. For exterior, above-grade walls and for other applications where another type is not

indicated, use Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight.

3. Mix to match Architect's sample.

4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Clay face brick.

b. Cast-stone trim units.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour

height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance of the Work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths

indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut

units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and

textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per

minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but

not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or

minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.



B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,

1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8

inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more

than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for

warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more

than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8

inch or minus 1/4 inch.

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than

1/8 inch.

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line

by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at

other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in

running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at

corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive

mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh

masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.



E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and

similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed

anchors and ties in mortar.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient

mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head

joints.

C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and

similar holes.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear

water.

2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.

3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.

4. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness unless otherwise indicated.

1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than

paint) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive cavity wall insulation and air barriers unless


3.6 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as follows:

1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use

adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement to allow for differential movement

regardless of whether bed joints align.



B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds

away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or

remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

C. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches

o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for

this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in

cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry

or other construction as shown.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and

masonry.

3.7 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the

following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of

type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints.

3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down.

4. Space anchors as indicated with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of

wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at

intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.

5. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel

beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to

trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.

3.8 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8

inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in parapet walls.

3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

4. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. at wall intersections and corners

extending 30 inches in each direction.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.



E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets,

column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-

plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction

of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if

any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.

3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.

4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 1/2

inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."

D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.10 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches

for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other

supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,

other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents

at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where

indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on

sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal



penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing

manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer

wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe.

3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer,

and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under air barrier,

lapping at least 4 inches.

4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each

end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches

to form end dams.

5. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2

inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric

sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application

indicated.

6. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking

hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with

requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

7. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible

flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of

metal drip edge.

8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is

completed.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to

comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges

located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of

wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU

webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be

built into masonry.

E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry

immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.

2. Space weeps 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with

loose-fill insulation.

F. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above

top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches, to maintain drainage.

1. Fill cavities full height by placing pea gravel in cavities as masonry is laid, so that at any

point, masonry does not extend more than 24 inches above top of pea gravel.

G. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration

requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.



3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support

reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of

reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened

sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them

during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough

strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to the distance between bond beams, but not more

than 60 inches.

3.13 POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits or a hollow drill bit

system. Drill bits shall be of diameters as specified by the anchor manufacturer. Unless

otherwise shown on the Drawings, all holes shall be drilled perpendicular to the concrete

surface.

B. Embedded Items: Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to

drilling holes for anchors. Exercise care in drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or

embedded items. Notify the Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

C. Base Material Strength: Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in concrete or masonry

until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

D. Perform anchor installation in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

E. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Set anchors to

manufacturer’s recommended torque, using a torque wrench. Following attainment of 10% of

the specified torque, 100% of the specified torque shall be reached within 7 or fewer complete

turns of the nut. If the specified torque is not achieved within the required number of turns, the

anchor shall be removed and replaced unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

F. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors: Clean all holes per manufacturer instructions to remove

loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Inject adhesive into holes

proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as



to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. Follow manufacturer recommendations to

ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. Sufficient adhesive shall be injected in the hole

to ensure that the annular gap is filled to the surface. Remove excess adhesive from the surface.

Shim anchors with suitable device to center the anchor in the hole. Do not disturb or load

anchors before manufacturer specified cure time has elapsed.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections

and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform

tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall

be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level C in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-

prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,

sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion

thereof.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for

compressive strength.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for

compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to

ASTM C 780.

G. Continuous observation of post-installed anchors is required.

3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Remove and replace misplaced or malfunctioning anchors. Fill empty anchor holes and patch

failed anchor locations with high-strength non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Anchors that fail to

meet proof load or installation torque requirements shall be regarded as malfunctioning.

C. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,

where indicated.



D. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar

fins and smears before tooling joints.

E. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes

or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding

with cleaning of masonry.

3. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical

Notes 20.

4. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's

property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as

described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's

property.



ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 1

SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured stone masonry adhered to unit masonry backup.

2. Manufactured stone masonry adhered to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for concealed flashing.


A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar and other items involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least three Samples in each set, and show the

full range of color and other visual characteristics in completed Work.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Test Reports:

1. Stone Test Reports: For stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing

agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion

resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within

previous five years.

2. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, indicating

that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and

recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone

fitters.



B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for

materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 72

inches high by full thickness, including face and backup construction and accessories.

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.

b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of mockup

approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of

flashing left exposed to view (omit stone masonry above half of flashing).

c. Include metal studs, sheathing, building paper or wrap, drainage material, and

flashing in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.

2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.


A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not


B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with

dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,

under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.


A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills

with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry

when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides, and hold cover securely in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone

masonry face.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter, using coverings spread

on the ground and over the wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by



frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in



deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days

after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of flashing and

similar items to be built into stone masonry.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each

cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or

producer.

2.2 MANUFACTURED STONE

A. Veneer Unit properties: Precast veneer units consisting of portland cement, lightweight

aggregates, and mineral oxide pigments.

1. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM C 39, 5 sample average: greater than

2,100psi (12.4MPa), no single test less than 1800 psi

2. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 50 psi (345kPa), minimum

3. Freeze-Thaw Test: ASTM C 67: Less than 3 percent weight loss and no disintegration.

4. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177: 0.445 at 1.5inches thick

5. Weight per square foot: ASTM C1670, less than 15 pounds, saturated

6. Linear Drying Shrinkage: Less than 0.10%, ASTM C1670

7. Maximum Absorption according to ASTM C 97/C 97M: 7.5 percent

B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pennsylvania Ledgestone as

manufactured by Stonecraft Industries, (888) 580-6448, www.stonecraft.com, or a comparable

product.

C. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic

effects.

2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Cement: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 1329.

B. Lime: ASTM C 207.

C. Sand: ASTM C 144, natural or manufactured sand.

http://www.stonecraft.com/



D. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, mineral oxide pigments.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Pre-Packaged Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4 or ANSI A118.15.

2.4 MORTAR MIXES

A. Standard Installation (Grouted Joints):

1. Mix mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270, Type S.

2. Polymer modified mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 or ANSI A118.15

a. Add color pigment in grout joint mortar in accordance with pigment

manufacturer’s instructions not to exceed 10% by weight of cement.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Weather Barrier: ASTM D 226, Type 1, No. 15, non-perforated asphalt-saturated felt paper.

B. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene,

urethane or PVC.

C. Cementitious Dampproofing: Cementitious formulation recommended by ILI and nonstaining

to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anchors and attachments.

D. Weep Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Mesh Weep Holes: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full width of

head joint and 2 inches high by thickness of stone masonry; in color selected from

manufacturer's standard.

E. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with

ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying

with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.

F. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations

indicated.

G. Water Repellent: Water based silane or siloxane masonry water repellent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect adjacent work from contact with mortar.

B. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

instructions for the type of substrate being covered.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install and clean stone in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions for

Standard Installation (Grouted Joint) as specified above.

B. Apply water repellent in accordance with repellent manufacturer’s application instructions.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer’s Field Service Representative shall make two

periodic site visits review of on-going installation process.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove protective coverings from adjacent work.

B. Cleaning Veneer Units:

1. Wash with soft bristle brush and water/granulated detergent solution

2. Rinse immediately with clean water

C. Removing Effloresence:

1. Allow veneer to dry thoroughly

2. Scrub with soft bristle brush and clean water

3. Rinse immediately with clean water; allow to dry

4. If efflorescence is still visible, contact manufacturer for assistance.

3.6 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE

A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as

described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 044313.16


CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 1

SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cast stone trim.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include

dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.

1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.


1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size.

2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project.

D. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according

to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.

1. Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those

indicated for this Project that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units,

and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute.

B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source

or producer for each aggregate.



D. Mockups: Furnish cast stone for installation in mockups specified in Division 04 Section "Unit

Masonry."


A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and to

minimize the need for on-site storage.

B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.

1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move

cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.

2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers,

securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units.

Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not


D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination can be avoided.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements

in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven

days after completing cleaning.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturers

who belong to the Cast Stone Institute as published their web site with the following stipulation:

B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or

wet-cast method.

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory

testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.

C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all

exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.



1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.

3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8

inch.

2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the

length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch.

3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever

is greater.

4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary

from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on

unformed surfaces.

E. Cure units as follows:

1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and

temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours.

2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:

a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.

b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above.

c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above.

d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.

F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

G. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana

limestone.

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M,

ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.

B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying

with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.

C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: as specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

2.4 MORTAR MIXES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR

A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges

and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to

secure units in place.

2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other

Sections.

C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.

D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.

1. Set units with joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide unless otherwise indicated.

2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set.

3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.

4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set.

5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.

6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to

receive sealant.

E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to

uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess

mortar as joints are raked.

F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch.

Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next

layer.

G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness unless otherwise indicated.

H. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and

pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated.

1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated.

3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch.



4. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints

before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.

5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable

requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch

maximum.

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch

maximum.

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-

fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved

Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with

other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.

1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes

or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes.

Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast

stone.

3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid

strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing

thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's

written instructions.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors.

3. Grout.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Miscellaneous steel shapes, loose steel lintels, shelf angels, bearing plates, anchors, and

other miscellaneous steel built into unit masonry and cold-formed metal framing.

2. Miscellaneous steel shapes for steel joist and deck construction.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing steel shapes built into concrete

construction.

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates, loose lintels, anchor bolts,

and other items built into unit masonry.

3. Section 052100 “Steel Joist Framing” for miscellaneous steel and framing supporting

equipment and openings.

4. Section 054000 “Cold-Formed Metal Framing” for miscellaneous steel supporting or

connected to cold-formed metal framing.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in

AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."





B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.


C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Source quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification

Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 360.

3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1.7 COORDINATION


drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project

site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected

or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information

and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using AISC 360.

2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.



2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

F. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for

galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less

than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-

Paint 20.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, ANCHORS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers for Cold-Formed Steel Connections:

ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563,

Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436

(ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Wedge Anchors Built into Masonry: Hilti Kwik Bolt 3, ICC ESR-1385 and ESR-2302.

1. Size: As indicated.

2. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

C. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors: HIT-HY 200 Safe Set System using Hilti Hollow Drill

Bit and VC 20/40 vacuum System or HIT-HY 70 System, threaded steel rod, complete with

nuts, washers, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Size as indicated on Drawings.

1. Interior Use: Provide carbon steel threaded rods conforming to, ASTM A 193 Type B7

with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (SC1).

2. Exterior Use: Provide rods with hot-dip zinc coating complying with

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Headed Stud Anchors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-

finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.



2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency

suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength (28 Days): 6000 psi (41.4 MPa).

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according

to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

B. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

C. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to

pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes

or enlarge holes by burning.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Fabricate steel plates and angles with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated to

be embedded in masonry and concrete construction.

1. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Fabricate loose steel lintels and masonry shelf angles from steel angles and shapes of size

indicated for openings and recesses in walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in

single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated.

1. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear

span, but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

2. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

G. Fabricate steel shapes and connectors used in cold-formed metal framing of shape, size, and

thickness indicated.

H. Fabricate steel angles for steel deck and joist connections of size and thickness indicated.

Fabricate in single lengths as practical. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit.



2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).

5. Galvanized surfaces.

6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,

slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to one of the following specifications and

standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness

of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,

edges, and exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with

requirements.




3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to

AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and

roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before

packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.

Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint

specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.




B. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1

SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. K-series steel joists.

2. K-series steel joist substitutes.

3. Joist girders.

4. Joist accessories.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight

Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support

nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's

"Specifications."


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.

2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.

3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer.


C. Manufacturer certificates.

D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.



E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for its preparation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying

with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for

designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into masonry construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design

loads indicated.

1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than

the following:

a. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.

b. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs

indicated.



2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web

Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord

members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.

B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel

Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications.".

E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist

slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).

2.3 JOIST GIRDERS

A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specification for Joist Girders" in SJI's

"Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; with end and top-chord

arrangements as follows:

1. End Arrangement: Underslung with bottom-chord extensions.

2. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel.

B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joist girders.

C. Camber joist girders according to SJI's "Specifications."

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance

requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of

material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing,

and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly

designs indicated.

B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes

and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.



C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex

steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and

ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

F. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist

manufacturer to complete joist assembly.

2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and

accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a

continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting

construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written instructions, and

requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.

2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.

3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding

sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and



procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with

RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for

high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are

applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or

beams.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Visually inspect bolted connections.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according

to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting

structural steel, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool

cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.



STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.

2. Noncomposite form deck.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural

concrete fill over steel deck.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous

steel shapes.

3. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for framing deck openings with cold-

formed steel shapes.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,

cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

B. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of

the following complies with requirements:

1. Powder-actuated mechanical fasteners.

C. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Steel Roof Deck Manufacturer: Member producer of SDI.



2. Mechanical Fastener Manufacturer: Member producer of SDI and ISO 9001 accredited

for manufacturing quality control.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. All mechanical fastener installers certified or licensed by the fastener and tool system

manufacturer on the project site in accordance with ANSI A10.3 requirements.

Certification or licensing includes all training necessary for proper tool operation,

fastener selection, maintenance and troubleshooting.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof

covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to

AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI

Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the

following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),

G90 (Z275) zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib.

3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch (0.75 mm).

5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

6. Side Laps: Overlapped.



2.3 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK

A. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to

comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI

Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 60 (415),

G90 (Z275) zinc coating.

2. Profile Depth: 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0238 inch (0.60 mm).

4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

5. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, powder-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws as indicated on drawings.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, as indicated on drawings.

D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000

psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same

material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of

same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication

No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.

F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,

finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.





A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in

SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned

and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract

side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Welding is not permitted.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by mechanical fastening at intervals

indicated on the drawings.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Mechanically fasten side laps and perimeter edges of

panels between supports, at intervals indicated on the drawings.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.

D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end

closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

Mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Fasten cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise

indicated.

3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by mechanical fastening at intervals

indicated on the drawings.



B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Mechanically fasten side laps and perimeter edges of

panels between supports, at intervals indicated on the drawings.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2

inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Mechanically fasten steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to

supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Mechanically fasten steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-

closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open

ends of ribs and sides of deck.




3.6 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck

with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written

instructions.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Load-bearing wall and shear wall framing, including parapets and headers.

2. Roof rafter framing.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under this Section:

1. Post-installed anchors

2. Steel angles supporting steel deck.


1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non-load-bearing,

metal-stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling-suspension assemblies.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf

angles, and post-installed anchors used with cold-formed metal framing.





B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;

fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,

bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining

work.

3. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis and detailed shop drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer, who shall be licensed in the State in which the Project is located and

responsible for their preparation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Steel sheet.

2. Powder-actuated anchors.

3. Mechanical fasteners.

4. Vertical deflection clips.

5. Horizontal drift deflection clips

6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

C. Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed steel framing, post-installed anchors and powder-actuated

fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

D. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for post-installed anchors.

E. Installer Qualifications & Procedures for post-installed anchors: Submit installer qualifications.

Submit a letter of procedure stating method of drilling, the product proposed for use, the

complete installation procedure, manufacturer training date, and a list of the personnel to be

trained on anchor installation.


A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing

members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud

Association the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers

Association.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other

structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering

services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for

installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this project in

material, design, and extent.

D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house

testing with calibrated test equipment, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,

including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical

requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

E. Installer Qualifications:

1. Drilled-in anchors shall be installed by an installer with at least three years of experience

performing similar installations.



F. Installer Training: Conduct a thorough training with the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s

representative for the installer on the project. Training to consist of a review of the complete

installation process for drilled-in anchors, to include but not limited to:

1. Hole drilling procedure

2. Hole preparation & cleaning technique

3. Adhesive injection technique & dispenser training / maintenance

4. Proof loading/torquing

G. Comply with AISI Specifications and Standards.

1. AISI S100 “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel

Structural Members”.

2. AISI S200 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General

Provisions”.

3. AISI S201 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Product

Standard”.

4. AISI S211 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Wall Stud

Design”.

5. AISI S212 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Header Design”.

6. AISI S213 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Lateral Design”.

7. AISI “Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing”.

H. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1. Protect and store cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining,

deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required in

AISI's "Code of Standard Practice".

1.6 COORDINATION


drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project

site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



"Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design

loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.



2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than the following:

a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall

height.

b. Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the horizontally projected

span for live loads.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside

the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure,

connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects

when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction

tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as

follows:

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection

without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Design Standards:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.

2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.

3. Headers: AISI S212.

4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply

with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and

coating designation as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance or as indicated for shear wall assemblies.

2. Coating: G90 (Z275).

2.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,

with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).



B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,

with straight flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.


C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header

beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:



2.4 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING

A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with

stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H,

metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise

indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.

3. Web stiffeners.

4. Anchor clips.

5. End clips.

6. Foundation clips.

7. Gusset plates.

8. Stud kickers and knee braces.

9. Hangers and end closures.

10. Hole-reinforcing plates.

11. Backer plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems suitable for application indicated, fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials, with an allowable load capacity greater than or equal to the design

load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on

ICC-ES AC70.



C. Mechanical Fasteners:

1. Steel screws: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel

drill screws.

a. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard

elsewhere.

2. Masonry screws: Masonry screw anchors (predrilled fastners) qualified from ICC-ES or

other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I; and clean, natural sand,

ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum

water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining

grout, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute

working time.

D. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of

same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's

standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by screw fastening or pneumatic pin

fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

Welding is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws

penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by bolting, pneumatic pin fastening,

or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection

stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.



C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable

variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements

of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-

square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and

the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or rafter locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface

on supporting concrete or masonry construction.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field

assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's

written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting

structure.

1. Screw or bolt, wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even,

true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated

panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by screw fastening or pneumatic pin

fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. Welding is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with

requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.



E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track

or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for

which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire

integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are

secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame

both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly

members, such as headers, sills and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on

completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved

or standard punched openings.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING AND SHEAR WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and

securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks, with gap not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm)

between the end of wall-framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to

top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or

warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where roof framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs

cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing

cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting

structure.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings.

Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs,

complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. Fasten jamb

members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs

with clip angles and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.



H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support

fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring

attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's

written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load

resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically as indicated on Shop Drawings.

Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, mechanically fastened to webs of punched

studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing

members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness

indicated on shop drawings and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match

studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges, and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges; terminate at and fasten to

reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of

bracing and anchor to structure as shown on drawings.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and

stable wall-framing system.

3.5 ROOF RAFTER INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with AISI's S210 "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel

Framing - Floor and Roof System Design”.

B. Install perimeter rafter track sized to match rafters. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to

supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Install rafters bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,

brace, and reinforce. Fasten rafters to both flanges of rafter track.

1. Install rafters over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38

mm).

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of rafters with web stiffeners, end clips, hangers, steel

clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.

D. Space rafters not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Rafter Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Frame openings with built-up rafter headers, consisting of rafter and rafter track or another

combination of connected rafters if indicated.



F. Install rafter reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of rafter section located

directly over interior support, with lapped rafters of equal length to rafter reinforcement or as

indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

G. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each rafter

intersection as follows:

1. Rafter-Track Solid Bridging: Rafter-track solid blocking of width and thickness

indicated, secured to rafter webs.

2. Combination Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness

indicated and rafter-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat

straps to bottom flange of rafters and secure solid blocking to rafter webs.

H. Secure rafters to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

I. Install miscellaneous rafter framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces,

clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete

and stable rafter-framing assembly.

3.6 POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits or a hollow drill bit

system. Drill bits shall be of diameters as specified by the anchor manufacturer. Unless

otherwise shown on the Drawings, all holes shall be drilled perpendicular to the concrete

surface.

B. Embedded Items: Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to

drilling holes for anchors. Exercise care in drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or

embedded items. Notify the Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

C. Base Material Strength: Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in concrete or masonry

until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

D. Perform anchor installation in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

E. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Set anchors to

manufacturer’s recommended torque, using a torque wrench. Following attainment of 10% of

the specified torque, 100% of the specified torque shall be reached within 7 or fewer complete

turns of the nut. If the specified torque is not achieved within the required number of turns, the

anchor shall be removed and replaced unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

F. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors: Clean all holes per manufacturer instructions to remove

loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Inject adhesive into holes

proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as

to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. Follow manufacturer recommendations to

ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. Sufficient adhesive shall be injected in the hole



to ensure that the annular gap is filled to the surface. Remove excess adhesive from the surface.

Shim anchors with suitable device to center the anchor in the hole. Do not disturb or load

anchors before manufacturer specified cure time has elapsed.


A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable

tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from

plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of

sheathing or other finishing materials.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections as

indicated in the Statement of Special Inspections.

B. Continuous observation of post-installed anchors is required.

3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and

installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to

ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time

of Substantial Completion.

C. Remove and replace misplaced or malfunctioning anchors. Fill empty anchor holes and patch

failed anchor locations with high-strength non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Anchors that fail to

meet proof load or installation torque requirements shall be regarded as malfunctioning.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings.

2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

4. Metal ladders.

5. Bollards.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,

slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items

built into unit masonry.

3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in

concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support

railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

3. Metal ladders.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings and ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed

by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:



A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



"Quality Requirements," to design railings and ladders.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under

conditions indicated:



1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as

supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger

bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inchclearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall

surface.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless

another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel

fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.



B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and

class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of

construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching

them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,

where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the

load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in

concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified

independent testing agency.

G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise

indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or

ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip

galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying

with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than

3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts,

complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as

needed for fastening to inserts.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer


1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal

and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.



D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed

surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally

welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch

hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise

indicated.



2.7 FABRICATION, RAILINGS

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to

support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units

for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of

joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of


surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide

weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.




3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:

1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

J. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each

repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend

without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.



N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.

Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with

inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal

plate forming bottom closure.

P. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless-steel tube or pipe whose ID

is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top,

to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to

resist being dislodged.

1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing

sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.

Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of

open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent

construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.9 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.

3. Rungs: 1-inch-diameter steel bars.

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-

oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled

with aluminum-oxide grout.



6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or

bolted steel brackets.

7. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate from 4.5 inch diameter steel pipe, ASTM 500B grade steel, primed finish.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from

concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than

two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.

2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of

grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded

in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning."

3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance

Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and

levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in

contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:





4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and

other connectors.

F. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.

Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is

performed in the shop or in the field.

3.3 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted

into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout,

mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for

installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space

between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with

anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring

material.

D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by

conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

E. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.

3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to

railing ends.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to

railing ends.

C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or

lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.

3.5 INSTALLING BOLLARDS

A. Direct embed to provide 48 inch bollard height. Fill pipe with concrete – see section 033000.

B. Install one-piece HDPE plastic bollard cover, color: yellow, wall thickness: 0.25 inches

minimum.

3.6 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair




3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial

Completion.



METAL PAN STAIRS 055113 - 1

SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.

2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.

3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.

2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on

required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.


A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following:

1. Prefilled metal-pan-stair treads.

2. Abrasive nosings.

3. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of nosing.



D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed

by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:


2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



"Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above.

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B,

or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B,

or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, either commercial steel, Type B,

or structural steel, Grade 33, unless another grade is required by design loads.

2.3 ABRASIVE NOSINGS

A. Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon

carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary

to accurately fit openings or conditions.

1. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.

B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard

with manufacturer.

C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete.

D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior

walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,

where indicated, flat washers.

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to

be galvanized.



D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without

failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times

the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to

ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer


1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal

and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day

compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

G. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused,

aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing,

moisture, or cleaning materials.

H. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless



A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,

brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and

platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only

as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and

coordinated installation.



C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of


surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld connections to comply with the following:





4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners

where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)

screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for

Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless

more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing

members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.

4. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed

for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from

steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than

0.067 inch.

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet.

2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet, where indicated.

3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they are

concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.

4. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld

brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting.



5. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.

6. Attach abrasive nosings to risers.

7. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

2.8 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications".

2.9 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.

2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain

as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-

SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with

galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise

indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and

Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary

for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and

masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from

established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete


D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.



F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread

width.

H. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space

posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each

direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members.

2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail

ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at

spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as

required to comply with performance requirements.

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or

lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair




MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

3. Wood furring.

4. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal

size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include

physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before

and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of

treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.



3. Power-driven fasteners.

4. Post-installed anchors.

5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that

periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is

representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide

for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is

indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19

percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in

contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations

shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect

finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review.



D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-

test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test

method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread

index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant

progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame

front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during

the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where

indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where

exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to

ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to

ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high-

temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors

of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for

Project's climatological zone.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall

not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FRAMING

A. Framing: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any of the following species:

1. Southern pine; SPIB.

2. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.

3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

4. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.

5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.



2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

4. Cants.

5. Furring.

6. Grounds.

7. Utility shelving.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB.

2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

3. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

5. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will

interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in

thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,

or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.



C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw

manufacturer for material being fastened.

D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 ICC-ES AC193 as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.

2. KC Metals Products, Inc.

3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.

4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

5. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-

strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B

(HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.


A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with

ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl

rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum

foil, or spun-bonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame

Construction," unless otherwise indicated.



B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit

carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar

supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities

requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with

classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install

fasteners through each fastener hole.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips

not more than 16 inches o.c.

G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and

as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96

inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to

close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at

ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not

inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width

as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to

limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below

partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more

than 20 feet o.c.

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or

optimum joint arrangement.

I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated

lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.



K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying

with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-

Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.

Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails

snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other

work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces


3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required

for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring

horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough

carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by

spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wall sheathing.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2. Division 07 Section "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers" for air barriers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air

circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL SHEATHING AND EXTERIOR SOFFITS

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass

Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation.

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 5/8 inch thick.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this Article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.



C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in

length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached,

with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of

more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C

1002.

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM

C 954.


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that

is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both

adhesives and panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to

use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting

construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.

Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of

structural support elements.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so

sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is

forecast.

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.

2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements.



3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that

might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of

each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board

to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from

edges and ends of boards.



PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

2. Wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinet doors where indicated.

3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet

installation.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips

required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet

installation.

2. Section 123661 "Quartz Agglomerate Countertops".



1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for installed in architectural plastic-

laminate cabinets.


1. Plastic laminates for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

2. Lumber and Panel Products with Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12

inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.

3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.





B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-

service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have

been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,

store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in

"Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and

90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the

construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress

to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish

dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and

coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed

as indicated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Regional Materials: Plastic-laminate cabinets shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project

site.

B. Type of Construction: Frameless.

C. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard.


following:

a. Abet Laminati, Inc.

b. Formica Corporation.

c. Lamin-Art, Inc.

d. Panolam Industries International, Inc.

e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

E. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.

3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.

4. Edges: Grade VGS.

F. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,

Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching

laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide

surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge

banding.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative

laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to sub-front with mounting screws

from interior of body.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5711&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456827149&mf=&src=wd







1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical

fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures

of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Match Architect's sample.

2.2 WOOD CABINETS DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.

C. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: as selected by Architect from one of the species indicated below.

1. Species: Red oak, white oak, white ash or white birch.

2. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn.

3. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.

2.3 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality

standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of

referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless


1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Postconsumer

recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no

urea formaldehyde.

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde.

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.

5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde.

6. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with

requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural

cabinets.



B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of

opening, self-closing.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer

rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-

steel ball-bearing slides.

3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide

Grade 2.

4. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than

24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-

100.

6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1.

7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

G. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product

class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less

than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-

metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.



2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent

possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for

scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical

work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams

to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and

burrs.

2.7 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Shop finish transparent-finished architectural cabinets at fabrication shop as

specified in this Section.

B. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom.

2. Finish: System - 4, water-based latex acrylic or 5, conversion varnish.

3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.

4. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to

dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.

5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per

ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as

required.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not

completed in the shop.

B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install

level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish.



D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws

for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16

inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration

into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

F. Shop Finishes: Touch up finishing after installation of architectural cabinets. Fill nail holes with

matching filler.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces

where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied.


A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform

appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.



EXTERIOR SYNTHETIC TRIM 066500 - 1

SECTION 066500 - EXTERIOR SYNTHETIC TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior trim composed of synthetic materials.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, and blocking required for installing

trim and concealed within other construction before trim installation.

2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for finishing synthetic trim.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including installation instructions.

B. Samples for Verification:

1. Synthetic trim for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-

service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification

marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Storage and Handling Requirements:

1. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Keep materials in protective covering until installation.

3. Store materials in clean, dry area.



4. Store exterior synthetic trim on flat, level surface.

5. Keep exterior synthetic trim covered and free of dirt and debris.

6. Protect materials and finish during storage, handling, and installation to prevent damage.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace trim that fails due to defects in manufacturing within

specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deterioration, delamination,

and excessive swelling from moisture.

B. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

manufactured by Boral Composites Inc., 200 Mansell Court East, Suite 305, Roswell, Georgia

30076. (888) 926-7259, www.BoralTruExterior.com, or a comparable product.

B. Other products may be acceptable – see Section 012500 Substitutions.

2.2 EXTERIOR SYNTHETIC TRIM

A. Exterior Synthetic (Poly-ash) Trim: Boral TruExterior® Trim.

B. Composition:

1. Post-Industrial Recycled Content: Minimum 70 percent, by weight.

2. Post-Consumer Recycled Content: Minimum 2 percent, by weight

3. Pigments and dyes.

C. Physical Properties:

1. Density, ASTM C 1185: 40 to 50 pcf.

2. Water Absorption, ASTM D 570: Less than 1.5 percent.

3. Fungi Rot, AWPA E10:

a. White Rot: Negligible loss.

b. Brown Rot: Negligible loss.

4. Termite Resistance, AWPA E1: Greater than 9.0, with 10 being impervious.

D. Mechanical Properties:

1. Flexural Strength, ASTM C 1185: Greater than 1,600 psi.

2. Nail Withdrawal, ASTM D 1761: Greater than 40 lbf/in.

E. Thermal Properties:

http://www.boraltruexterior.com/



1. Coefficient of Linear Expansion, ASTM D 6341, Typical: 1.40E-05 in/in/degree F, tested

at minus 30 to 140 degrees F.

2. Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: Between 25 and 29

3. Smoke Developed, ASTM E 84: Less than 450.

F. Trim Sizes: see Drawings.

G. Manufacturing Tolerances:

1. Width: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

2. Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

3. Length: Plus 2 inches, minus 0 inch.

4. Edge Cut: Plus or minus 2 degrees.

5. Exposed Texture: Smooth.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Primer: Acrylic based, Low VOC, Factory applied on all sides.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. Type: Screws, Finish: Stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive exterior synthetic trim.

B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.

C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install exterior synthetic trim in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations

indicated on the Drawings.

B. Do not install exterior synthetic trim in structural or load-bearing applications.

C. Install exterior synthetic trim plumb, level, and square.

D. Install exterior synthetic trim with flush, tight joints.

E. Install Fasteners:

1. Maximum of 24 inches on center.

2. Within 2 inches of end of boards.

F. Fill nail and screw holes with acrylic caulk, wood filler, or auto body filler.



G. Repair minor damages to exterior synthetic trim in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

and as approved by Architect.

H. Remove and replace damaged exterior synthetic trim that cannot be successfully repaired as

determined by Architect.

I. Painting:

1. Apply top coat to exterior synthetic trim over factory-applied primer, within 150 days of

installing trim.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed exterior synthetic trim to ensure that, except for normal weathering, trim will

be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.

2. Glass-fiber blanket.


1. Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of

roofing construction.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound-attenuating acoustic batt insulation used

metal framed partitions.




A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project

site until just before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each

area of construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman numeral

designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order

does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics.

B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV, Drainage Panels; See exterior wall types and wall

sections for locations: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced;

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per

ASTM E 84; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved

drainage channels.


following:

a. DiversiFoam Products.

b. Dow Chemical Company (The).

c. Owens Corning.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: See wall types and wall sections for locations: ASTM C 665,

Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively,

per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Owens Corning.

2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS

A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: See wall type details for locations: ASTM C 665, Type I

(blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and

smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for

combustion characteristics.


following:

a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC).

b. Roxul Inc.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:



1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections

capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,

rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill

voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,

and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or

required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c.

both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation

between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units

firmly against inside substrates.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall

ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following

requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a

snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or

protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced

blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to

flanges of metal studs.



B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required

to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and

other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse

and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after

installation.



FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1

SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-retarding membrane air barriers.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration

treatments.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of

air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.

C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to

an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement

through the wall.



1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating

substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.



B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and

accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the

barrier.

C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing

agency.




A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: See Section 042000 for information regarding the construction of mockups.


A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.

2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single

source from single manufacturer.

B. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA

Method 24) and complying with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air

barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental

condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating

substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material

changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions

without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

2.3 VAPOR-RETARDING MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane.

1. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Henry

Company Air-Bloc 32MR or a comparable product by one of the following

manufacturers:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Barritech VP.

b. Grace, W. R., & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier VP.

c. Rubber Polymer Corporation, Inc.; Rub-R-Wall Airtight VP.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456830668&mf=04&src=wd





d. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.00012 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.

pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 0.08 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M.

c. Elastic Recovery: 90% to CAN/CGSB 37.58M86.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete

air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.

B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

D. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive

adhesive tape.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch` thick, and Series 300

stainless-steel fasteners.

F. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane

foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to

ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant

manufacturer.

G. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, smooth surfaced, self-adhering;

consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with

release liner backing and the following properties:

1. Air leakage: <0.0001 CFM/ft² @1.6 lbs/ft2 to ASTM E2178,

2. Vapor permeance: 0.03 perms to ASTM E 96,

3. Membrane Thickness: 0.0394 inches (40 mils),

4. Low temperature flexibility: -22 degrees F to CGSB 37-GP-56M,

5. Elongation: 200% to ASTM D412-modifed

H. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low

modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

I. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid;

trowel grade.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other

contaminants.

2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air-

barrier manufacturer.

3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by

plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray

affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other

penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,

holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.

E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and

edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another

with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous

support for air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to

ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from

joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.

1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's recommended

preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks.

Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip

in preparation coat.



B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193

and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air-barrier material

at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of

fluid air-barrier material over joint reinforcing strip.

3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier

manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a

continuous air barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base

flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install modified bituminous strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a

minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will

be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24

hours.

1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to

achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air

barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and

window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door

framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with

termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended

application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within

these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,

storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip so that a minimum of 3

inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm

bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

1. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and

miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.

H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with

termination mastic.

I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inchwide, modified

bituminous strip.



J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by

metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and

flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired

areas in strip direction.

3.5 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to

achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature

ranges.

1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day.

Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

3. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to

achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates

according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around

protrusions such as masonry ties.

1. Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Total wet film thickness as recommended in

writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 75-mil dry

film thickness, applied in one coat.

C. Apply strip and transition strip over cured air-barrier material overlapping 3 inches onto each

surface according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair

substrates and reapply air-barrier components.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period,

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work

using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.



METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213.53 - 1

SECTION 074213.53 - METAL SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal soffit panels.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,

joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,

and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not

less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color

finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.



B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.







A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or

deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and

surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and

ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of

water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,

denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of

walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-

applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the

following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Perimeter and Corner Uplift Pressure: -51.1 PSF.

b. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Design Category: D.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to

ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. General: Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting

side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using

concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. V-Groove-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Perforated panels formed with vertical panel edges and

intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges; with a V-groove joint

between panels.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “E-375”

soffit manufactured by Englert, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

a. ATAS International, Inc.

b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.

c. Dimensional Metals, Inc.

d. Fabral.

e. Innovative Metals Company, Inc.

f. McElroy Metal, Inc.

g. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.



2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel

sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural

quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.022 inch or 24 gauge.

b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

c. Color: “Preweathered Galvalume”

3. Panel Coverage: 12 inches.

4. Panel Height: 3/8 inches.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel

sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50

aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's

standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system

including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match

material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or

premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or

necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as

required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim

with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed

fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied

coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with

panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,

nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain

weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's

standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements



demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and

structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and

seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-

lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant

and to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not

allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored

or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel

manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

metal soffit panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal

being secured.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable

if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize

contrast.

C. Steel Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written

instructions.

2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored

acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting


1. Examine sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking

and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support

members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written

recommendations.

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,

sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise

indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with

provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.

2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be

concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.

6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

7. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use

galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect

against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at

location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.



1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of metal panels.

3. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress

washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in

predrilled holes.

E. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight

mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other

components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, corners,

seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide

types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types

recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

F. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners

where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,

and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling, and tool marks, and that is true

to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet

metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of

corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not

be waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch

deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel

manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and

sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 074646 - 1

SECTION 074646 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fiber-cement siding.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.

2. Section 072726 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers" for weather-resistive barriers.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper

sequencing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.


1. 12-inch-long-by-actual-width Sample of siding.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of fiber-cement siding.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for fiber-cement siding.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fiber-cement siding required, from ICC-ES.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in





A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups for fiber-cement siding including accessories.

a. Size: 48 inches long by 72 inches high.

b. Include outside corner on one end of mockup.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use.

B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s 50-year warranty against manufactured defects in fiber cement panels.

B. Provide manufacturer’s 15-year warranty against manufactured defects in panel finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from

single manufacturer.

2.2 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested

according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to

ASTM E 84.

B. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AWP 1818

panels as manufactured by Nichiha Fiber Cement, or comparable product by one of the

following:

1. CertainTeed Corporation.

2. GAF.

3. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.

4. MaxiTile, Inc.

5. Norandex Building Materials Distribution, Inc.

C. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by

a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



D. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch.

E. Horizontal Pattern: Panels 17 7/8 inches by 71 9/16 inches.

1. Texture: Smooth.

2. Finish: Factory pre-finished.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Ultimate Clip System:

1. Starter Track: FA 700 (10mm rainscreen) – 10’ (3030mm) (l) galvalume.

2. Panel Clips: JEL 777 “Ultimate Clip” (10mm rainscreen for 5/8” AWP) – Zinc-

Aluminum-Magnesium alloy coated steel.

3. Joint Tab Attachments – used at all AWP-1818 panel to panel vertical joints.

4. Single Flange Sealant Backer – FHK 1017 (10mm) – 6.5’ (l) fluorine coated galvalume.

5. Double Flange Sealant Backer – FH 1020 (10mm) – 10’ (l) fluorine coated galvalume.

6. Corrugated Spacer – FS 1005 (5mm), FS 1010 (10mm) – 4’ (l).

7. Finish Clip (optional) – JE310 (5mm)

B. Aluminum Trim: Paint as specified in finish schedule.

C. Essential Flashing System:

1. Starter – main segments (3030mm), inside corners, outside corners

2. Compression Joint – main segments (3030mm)

3. Overhang – main segments (3030mm), inside corners, outside corners, joint clips

D. Fasteners:

1. Use stainless steel fasteners.

2. See manufacturer’s instructions for appropriate fasteners for construction method used.

E. Flashing: Provide stainless-steel flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing

and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of fiber-cement siding and related accessories.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install products in accordance with the latest installation guidelines of the

manufacturer and all applicable building codes and other laws, rules, regulations and

ordinances. Review all manufacturer installation, maintenance instructions, and other applicable

documents before installation.

1. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required within 2-10 feet of outside corners

finished with metal trim and approximately every 30 feet thereafter.

2. Horizontal/Compression Joints are required for multi-story installations of AWP. Locate

joints at floor lines. Joints are flashed minimum ½” breaks. Do not caulk. Refer to

installation guides.

B. Panel Cutting

1. Always cut fiber cement panels outside or in a well-ventilated area. Do not cut the

products in an enclosed area.

2. Always wear safety glasses and NIOSH/OSHA approved respirator whenever cutting,

drilling, sawing, sanding or abrading the products. Refer to manufacturer SDS for more

information.

3. Use a dust-reducing circular saw with a diamond-tipped or carbide-tipped blade.

a. Shears (electric or pneumatic) or jig saw can be used for complicated cuttings,

such as service openings, curves, radii and scrollwork.

4. Silica Dust Warning: Fiber cement products may contain some amounts of crystalline

silica, a naturally occurring, potentially hazardous mineral when airborne in dust form.

Consult product SDS or visit https://www.osha.gov/dsg/topics/silicacrystalline/.

C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a

weathertight installation.


A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new

materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean

condition during construction.



POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 075419 - 1

SECTION 075419 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) roofing system.

2. Roof insulation.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and

counterflashings.

3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

4. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck

Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers

of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's


3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,

including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.



8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments

to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing, fastening

spacing, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing.

4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color required.

2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, for tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's special warranty.




A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled

with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or

listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location

and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid

material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated

shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions

and warranty requirements.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, fasteners, roofing

accessories, and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners for roofing system

from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturers approved by membrane roofing

manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift

pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and

base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when

tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.



2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to

ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent

materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift

pressures:

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: -60 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: -60 lbf/sq. ft.

3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: -36 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof

Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.

2.3 PVC ROOFING

A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434/D 4434M, Type III, fabric reinforced.


following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. Cooley Engineered Membranes.

c. Custom Seal Roofing.

d. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc.

e. Flex Membrane International Corp.

f. GAF Materials Corporation.

g. GenFlex Roofing Systems.

h. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

i. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.

j. Versico Incorporated.

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.

3. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use

and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement,

thickness, and color as PVC sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=5098

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457005764












D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,

approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, pre-punched.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and

acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination

reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by PVC roofing

manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of

thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber

mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.

b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.

c. Firestone Building Products.

d. Hunter Panels.

e. Rmax, Inc.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use

and compatibility with roofing.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and

acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof

insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.

2.7 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured

walkway rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.









PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and

roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with

requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking

place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or

left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing

roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation

thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer

staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does

not restrict flow of water.



F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch

with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof

insulation to deck type.

1. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive,

firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation

adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.5 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written

instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.

B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions

required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by

manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of

roofing.

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and

perimeter of roofing.

F. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and

sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam

installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut

edges of sheet.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

H. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with

clamping ring.

3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to

roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow

to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet

flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side

and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.

3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products

to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface

preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to

furnish reports to Architect.

B. Flood Testing: Flood test each roofing area for leaks, according to recommendations in

ASTM D 5957, after completing roofing and flashing but before overlying construction is

placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with water.

1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not

exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of base flashing.

2. Flood each area for 24 hours.

3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until roofing

and flashing installations are watertight.

C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect

roofing installation on completion.

D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that

they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if

replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When

remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and

damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver.

2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.

3. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.

4. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

6. Formed equipment support flashing.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of

penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,

joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.




and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project.

4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.



6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.

7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.

8. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable.

9. Include details of special conditions.

10. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and

in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous

Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed

accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.

4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color

required.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in



A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing

and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful

in-service performance.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might

cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials

away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to

sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and

trim installation.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal

flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within


1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed

sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing

Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and

profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings tested according to

SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

1. Design Wind Loads:

a. Basic Wind Speed: 131 mph

b. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding

wind load design pressures of +33.0 lbs./sq. ft. inward and -44.0 lbs./sq. ft.

outward.

D. Seismic Performance: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces Insert temperature

change.



2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with

temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat

surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply

coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'


2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry

film thickness of 0.5 mil

C. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper.

1. Non-patinated Exposed Finish: Mill.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M,, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat

surface.

1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene,

synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures over

220 deg F and complying with physical requirements of ASTM D 226/D 226M for Type I and

Type II felts.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Summit.

b. Engineered Coated Products; Nova-Seal II.

c. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Comp.

d. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade.

C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant

polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified

asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7017&mf=04&src=wd







temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of

underlayment manufacturer.



a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT.

b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Grace Ice and

Water Shield HT.

c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.

d. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra SA.

e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.

f. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment.

g. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Deck Guard HT.

h. Protecto Wrap Company; Protecto Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT.

i. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade SA-HT.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg For higher.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg For

lower.

D. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as

recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by

manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or

factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers

under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal

being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching

internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead with maximum

lead content of 0.2 percent.













D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape

with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2

inchwide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain

watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited

movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted

joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing

for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inchintervals along length of flashing to provide

integral mortar bond.

1. Copper: 10-oz. minimum for fully concealed flashing; 16 oz. elsewhere.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing Dovetail.

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.

3) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone Three-Way Interlocking

Thruwall Flashing.

4) Sandell Manufacturing; Pre-Formed Metal Flashing.

2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing Dovetail.

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.

3) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone Three-Way Interlocking

Thruwall Flashing.

4) Sandell Manufacturing; Pre-Formed Metal Flashing.

B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of

separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated.














offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Cheney Flashing Company.

b. Fry Reglet Corporation.

c. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.

d. Hickman, W. P. Company.

e. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

f. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.

g. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.

h. Sandell Manufacturing.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick.

3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top

edge.

4. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.

5. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.

2.6 COPINGS

A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths

not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed

splice plates with finish matching coping caps.


following:

a. Architectural Products Company.

b. ATAS International, Inc.

c. Berridge Manufacturing Company.

d. Castle Metal Products.

e. Cheney Flashing Company.

f. Drexel Metals.

g. Hickman Company, W. P.

h. Merchant & Evans Inc.

i. Metal-Era, Inc.

j. Perimeter Systems; a division of SAF.

k. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on or face leg hooked to continuous cleat with

back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.











a. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide,

with integral cleats.

b. Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.

2.7 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS


following:

1. Architectural Products Company.

2. ATAS International, Inc.

3. Berger Building Products, Inc.

4. Castle Metal Products.

5. Cheney Flashing Company.

6. CopperCraft by FABRAL.

7. Drexel Metals.

8. Hickman Company, W. P.

9. Merchant & Evans Inc.

10. Metal-Era, Inc.

11. Perimeter Systems; a division of SAF.

B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner

units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front

edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint

covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.040 inch thick.

2. Gutter Profile: Style A according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Gutter Supports: Manufacturer's standard supports as selected by Architect with finish

matching the gutters.

5. Gutter Accessories: Continuous snap-in plastic leaf guard.

C. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following

exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

D. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and

recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,

metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and

trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.



3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners

on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to

a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within

1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled

with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide

for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or

from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric

sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal

with epoxy seam sealer.

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.9 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof Edge Flashing: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long

sections. Furnish with 6-inchwide, joint cover plates.

1. Joint Style: Overlapped, 4 inches wide.

2. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following

materials:

1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.


C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following

materials:





D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.10 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not

exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous

lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form

with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of

mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed

water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to

manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of

mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.

Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature

restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing

underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not

less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2

inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.




A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings,

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing

and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat

seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating

sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners.

Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of

buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-

treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as

recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and

trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or

cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or

wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or

intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled

with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener

manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to

minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight

installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint

members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.

When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint

members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for



installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at

temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet

metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide

concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work

with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations

in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge

flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top

edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install

stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend

counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.

Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant


E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation

of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to

pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture

according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of

wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and

louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000

"Unit Masonry."

C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with

installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to

equipment support member.

B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other

overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on

Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.




A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance

of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch

offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering. Clean off excess sealants.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean

finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain

sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof curbs.

2. Equipment supports.

3. Roof hatches.

4. Preformed flashing sleeves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs

for access to roof hatches.

2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for manufactured, shop- and field-

formed metal flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and

miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.

3. Section 086200 "Unit Skylights" for glazed domed fiberglass skylights with curb frames.

4. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for special curbs designed

to accommodate seismic and vibration controls.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing

and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and

noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be

supported.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.


and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.



1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate

dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-

assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on

Samples of size to adequately show color.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For roof curbs and equipment supports indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof-mounted items to roof structure. Indicate

coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.

2. Wind-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind restraints. Show

anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-

mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.

3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit.

4. Required clearances.

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:







PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally

induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective

manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design roof curbs and equipment supports to comply with wind

performance requirements, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Wind-Restraint Performance: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and

dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, bearing

continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded

or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, stepped integral metal cant raised the

thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


following:

a. Adaptable Air Products.

b. AES Industries, Inc.

c. Air Balance Inc.; a division of MESTEK, Inc.

d. Bristolite Daylighting Systems, Inc.

e. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc.

f. Curbs Plus, Inc.

g. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.

h. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

i. KCC International Inc.

j. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

k. LMCurbs.

l. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

m. Metallic Products Corp.

n. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

o. Pate Company (The).

p. Plenums Incorporated.

q. Roof Curb Systems.

r. Roof Products and Systems (RPS); a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

s. Roof Products, Inc.

t. Thybar Corporation.

u. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to

be supported.

























C. Supported Load Capacity: As indicated on Drawings. Request information from Architect if

necessary.

D. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.

1. Finish: Mill phosphatized.

E. Construction:

1. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard compatible with roofing system.

2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to

conform to roof profile.

3. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise

indicated.

4. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck-mounting

flange or by use of leveler frame.

5. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height

tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip

unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.

6. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.

7. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.

8. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer under top flange on side of curb, continuous around

curb perimeter.

9. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded

strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb, of size

and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.

10. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide

weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with metal sheet

of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.

11. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and

finish as curb.

2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment Supports: Rail-type metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed

live and dead loads between structural supports, including equipment loads and other

construction indicated on Drawings, spanning between structural supports; capable of meeting

performance requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner

joints, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed

structure-mounting flange at bottom.


following:

a. Adaptable Air Products.


c. Air Balance Inc.; a division of MESTEK, Inc.

d. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc.

e. Curbs Plus, Inc.

f. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.

g. Greenheck Fan Corporation.











h. KCC International Inc.

i. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

j. LMCurbs.

k. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

l. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

m. Pate Company (The).

n. Plenums Incorporated.

o. Roof Curb Systems.

p. Roof Products and Systems (RPS); a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

q. Roof Products, Inc.

r. Thybar Corporation.

s. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to

be supported.

C. Supported Load Capacity: As indicated on Drawings. Request information from Architect if

necessary.

D. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.


E. Construction:

1. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard compatible with roofing system.

2. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.

3. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and

finish.

4. Nailer: Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide under top flange on

side of curb, continuous around support perimeter.

5. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded

strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb of size

and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.

6. Platform Cap: Where portion of equipment support is not covered by equipment, provide

weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with metal sheet

of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.

7. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and

finish as equipment support.

8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to

conform to roof profile.

9. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface


10. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to

accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip supports

with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.

2.4 ROOF HATCH

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or

mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and















weathertight perimeter gasketing, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof

insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


following:

a. Acudor Products, Inc.


c. Babcock-Davis.

d. Bilco Company (The).

e. Bristolite Daylighting Systems, Inc.

f. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.

g. Dur-Red Products.

h. Hi Pro International, Inc.

i. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

j. KCC International Inc.

k. Lexcor; a division of Luxsuco corp.

l. Menzies Metal Products.

m. Metallic Products Corp.

n. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

o. Natural Daylighting Systems.

p. O'Keeffe's Inc.

q. Pate Company (The).

r. Precision Ladders, LLC.

s. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 48 by 48 inches.

C. Loads: Minimum [40-lbf/sq. ft.] <Insert value> external live load and [20-lbf/sq. ft.] <Insert

value> internal uplift load.

D. Hatch Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated.


E. Construction:

1. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.

a. R-Value: 12.0 according to ASTM C 1363.

2. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter.

3. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal

liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.

4. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.

5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise

indicated.

6. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter

curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surfaces of perimeter























curb are level. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water

flow.

F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, galvanized-steel spring latch with turn handles,

galvanized-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,

fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;

attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having

jurisdiction.

1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.

2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel tube,

1-5/8 inches in diameter.

3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick.

4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches in

diameter.

5. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing

system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.

6. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated end

fittings.

7. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of

handrail and railing members.

8. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.

9. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.

10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

H. Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access

ladder.

1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed

position.

2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.

3. Material: Steel tube.

4. Post: 1-5/8-inch- diameter pipe.

5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.

a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.5 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES

A. Exhaust Vent Flashing: Double-walled metal flashing sleeve or boot, insulation filled, with

integral deck flange, 12 inches high, with removable metal hood and perforated metal collar.


following:

a. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.

b. Menzies Metal Products.






c. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.

3. Diameter: As indicated on Drawings.


B. Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange.


following:

a. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.

b. Menzies Metal Products.

c. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

d. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.

3. Height: 13 inches 19 inches Insert dimension.

4. Diameter: As indicated on Drawings.


2.6 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as

indicated.

C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for

aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or

chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E. Underlayment:

1. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,

nonperforated.

2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.

4. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of

slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified

asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

5. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application

and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being

fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the

following unless otherwise indicated:









a. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300

stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or

ASTM F 2329.

b. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

c. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or

silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by roof

accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use

classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required for

application.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs

in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.

3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete

installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.



4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or

loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating

where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood

substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended

slip sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of

roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.

D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each

other.

E. Roof-Hatch Installation:

1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating

mechanism and hardware.

2. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.

3. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Preformed Flashing-Sleeve Installation: Secure flashing sleeve to roof membrane according to

flashing-sleeve manufacturer's written instructions; flash sleeve flange to surrounding roof

membrane according to roof membrane manufacturer's instructions.

G. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to

Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Clean off excess sealants.

E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.

3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.





B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of

firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified

testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping

system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration

firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment

or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having

jurisdiction prior to submittal.



B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been

installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to

comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using

natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to


2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.

Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified

testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other

gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration

firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming

openings, and with penetrating items if any.


following:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products.





b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

c. Construction Solutions.

d. Grabber Construction Products.

e. Hilti, Inc.

f. HOLDRITE.

g. NUCO Inc.

h. Passive Fire Protection Partners.

i. RectorSeal.

j. Specified Technologies, Inc.

k. STC Architectural Products.

l. Tremco, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water

leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per

UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-

cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less

than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting

agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.

2. Substrate primers.

3. Collars.

4. Steel sleeves.














2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during

exposure to moisture.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

C. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

D. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,

comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate

proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer

speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce

products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings

immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following

requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials

that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable

of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose

particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's

recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage

and migration onto exposed surfaces.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths

required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of

firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and

penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with

the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering

not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of

wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to

ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with

requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that

penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial



Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out

and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials

to produce systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.

3. Latex joint sealants.

4. Acoustical joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples

with joint sealants in 1/2-inchwide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material

matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing

agency.



A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.



1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the

testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated

to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods

specified in this Section.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.


B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from

the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing

system shall comply with the following:

1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.



C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.

c. Pecora Corporation; 890.

d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995.

e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C

920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.



a. Pecora Corporation; 898.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,

Class 25, for Use NT.



a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.

b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 900.

c. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.

d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.

e. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic.

B. Immersible, Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.



a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.

b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.



2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,

Grade NF.



a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.

b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.

c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.

d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90.



a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,

primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer

based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)

or another type, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application

indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing

optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.



C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Porcelain enamel.

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-

sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or



by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of

products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without



deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage

or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants

immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Perimeter joints at frames of doors, windows and storefronts.

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 100/50.

3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 25.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior concrete slabs.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, Class 25.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings.

c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows and storefronts.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: Translucent.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.

1. Joint Location: Acoustical joints where indicated.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.


1. Section 087111 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

2. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow

metal doors and frames.

3. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door

controls and operators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance

ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

7. Details of accessories.

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.



9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit

and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded

to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum

4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to

permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld International, LLC.

2. Apex Industries, Inc.

3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc.

5. Concept Frames, Inc.

6. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

7. Custom Metal Products.

8. Daybar.

9. Deansteel.

10. de La Fontaine Industries.

11. DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc.

12. Door Components, Inc.

13. Fleming-Baron Door Products.

14. Gensteel Doors Inc.

15. Greensteel Industries, Ltd.

16. HMF Express.

17. Hollow Metal Inc.

18. Hollow Metal Xpress.






















19. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc.

20. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.

21. L.I.F. Industries, Inc.

22. LaForce, Inc.

23. Megamet Industries, Inc.

24. Mesker Door Inc.

25. Michbi Doors Inc.

26. MPI Group, LLC (The).

27. National Custom Hollow Metal.

28. North American Door Corp.

29. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The).

30. Pioneer Industries, Inc.

31. Premier Products, Inc.

32. Republic Doors and Frames.

33. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.

34. Security Metal Products Corp.

35. Shanahans Manufacturing Ltd.

36. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

37. Steward Steel; Door Division.

38. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.

39. Titan Metal Products, Inc.

40. Trillium Steel Doors Limited.

41. West Central Mfg. Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based

on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's

discretion.


























3. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with

minimum A40 coating.

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's

discretion.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A40 coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not

less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches

wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042

inch thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,

with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as

follows:



1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing

not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor

surface.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable

for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of

scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill

phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for

attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion

characteristics.

J. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness

per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,

and other deleterious impurities.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,

fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly

identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.



B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical

stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs

spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c.

Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at

manufacturer's discretion.

4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures of same material as

face sheets.

5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of

weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal

as frames.

1. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,

fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs

by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners


3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per

anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at

bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as

follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.



a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where

indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-

metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each

glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors

and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame

installation.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with

SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving

surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;

grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.

f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees

from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.



c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified

below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-

metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not

more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in

painting Sections.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.

3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

2. Section 087111 "Door Hardware" for installation of hardware.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for

openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;

construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

3. Requirements for veneer matching.

4. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

5. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.


1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for

each material and finish.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges

representing actual materials to be used.

a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.

b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required.

c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-

finished doors.




A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder

of construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or

replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

2. Ampco.

3. Chappell Door Co.

4. Eggers Industries.

5. General Veneer Manufacturing Co.

6. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.

7. Haley Brothers, Inc.

8. Ipik Door Company.

9. Lambton Doors.

10. Marlite.














11. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

12. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.

13. Oshkosh Door Company.

14. Poncraft Door Company.

15. Vancouver Door Company.

16. VT Industries, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Regional Materials: Flush wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site

from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,

within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do

not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive

pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating

indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer

stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated

without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent

seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

D. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea-

formaldehyde.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.

2. Species: Select maple.

3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).

4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.

5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.

6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.

7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor-

door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more.

8. Core: Particleboard.

9. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive

planed before veneering.

10. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.









2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads


1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.

2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.

B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed

of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish; and approved for

use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with

DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-

156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining.

B. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,

including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,

before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be

omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium.

2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Effect: Filled finish.

5. Sheen: Semigloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.



1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,

and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and

referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated

below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-

rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises

after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8

inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise

indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door

to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

b. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent

permitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no

evidence of repair or refinishing.



FOLDING DOORS 083513 - 1

SECTION 083513 - FOLDING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Section includes electrically operated folding fire apparatus bay doors.






and profiles, and finishes for folding doors.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and installation details.

2. Include clearances required for operation, operating and control mechanisms, and

accessory items.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories to verify color and finish selection.



B. Product Test Reports: For each fire-rated folding door, for tests performed by a qualified testing

agency.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fire-rated folding doors, from ICC-ES.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For folding doors to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.





approved by manufacturer of folding doors.


A. Loads

1. Doors shall be designed to withstand external or internal horizontal wind loads of +33.0

psf inward and -44.0 psf outward, minimum.

2. The maximum allowable deflection shall not exceed 1/120 of the span.

3. Fiber stresses in main members shall be limited to 27,000 pounds per square inch.

B. Steel frames shall be designed in accordance with the AISC “Steel Construction Manual”.

C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide glazed sectional doors that pass missile-impact

and cyclic-pressure tests according to ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3.

1. Large Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet of grade.

D. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Tube: ASTM A513 and ASTM A500/A500M

B. Steel Sheets: Steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M hot-

rolled steel sheet.

C. Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard components.

D. Fasteners: Zinc-coated steel.

2.2 FOLDING DOORS

A. Description: Electrically operated folding-door assembly, automatic or self-closing, and

complete with hardware, seals, track, closing devices, releasing devices, controls, and

accessories necessary for intended operation.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Four-Fold

FF700 as manufactured by Door Engineering and Manufacturing or an equal product by

an approved manufacturer.



B. Construction: Door framing shall be 11-gauge structural steel tube with 14-gauge galvannealed

sheet steel on the exterior and interior faces. Sheeting shall be formed on the vertical edges with

no visible welds on the interior or exterior panel faces. All frames and framing members shall

be true to dimension and square in all directions, and no door shall be bowed, warped, or out of

line, in the vertical or horizontal plane of the door opening by more than 1/8 inch in 20 feet.

Exposed welds and welds which interfere with the installation of various parts shall be ground

smooth and flush.

C. Surface Mounted Tube Frame: Supply pre-hung tube frame system constructed of TS6x6x0.25,

designed to anchor to masonry wall construction or weld to steel structure. All hinges, track

supports and operator supports shall be factory attached.

D. Factory finish:

1. All exposed steel shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard epoxy primer and

polyurethane top coat. Architect to select color from manufacturer’s standard color chart.

E. Operating Hardware: Hardware shall include guide tracks and brackets, trolleys, center guides,

not less than three pairs of jamb and fold hinges per opening, and all bolts, nuts, fasteners, etc.

necessary for complete installation and operation. Jamb hinges shall be dual shear and have two

thrust bearings and two needle bearings. Jamb hinges shall be gusseted. Fold hinges shall be

dual shear with two thrust bearings. All bearings shall be completely concealed within the hinge

barrel and include grease zerks. All hinge pins shall be minimum ¾” diameter hardened steel.

All trolleys shall be equipped three (3) 2” diameter cam followers. Track shall be constructed

from structural angle L3x3x0.5.

F. Weatherstripping: Material shall be adjustable and readily replaceable and provide a

substantially weather-tight installation. Weatherstripping at center shall be 1/16” cloth inserted

neoprene and include no exposed fasteners on the exterior face of the panel. Weatherstripping at

sill shall include two 1/16” cloth inserted neoprene sweeps with an aluminum retainer. The

retainer shall be attached to the door with adhesive.

1. Perimeter Weatherstripping: Provide jamb and head weatherstripping of 1/16” cloth-

inserted neoprene bulb (or closed cell neoprene).

G. Vision Panels: Provide 9/16” laminated, impact resistant safety glass vision panels of the size,

shape and location as noted on the drawings.

2.3 OPERATOR

A. Each door set shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit designed

for high cycle operation. Operator consists of an electric motor, gear reducer, and rotating drive

arm. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attached to the rotating drive arm on the

operator and to control arms attached to the jamb door section and to the door lintel. The

connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firm control at all times. The

connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control arms shall be equipped with

oil impregnated bronze bearings on polished shafts.

B. Operator shall be instantly reversible, open and close rapidly and start and stop gradually.

Operator shall be adjustable to allow door to fully clear the opening. Operator shall



automatically lock the door in the closed position. Operator shall be equipped with disengaging

mechanism to convert to freewheeling mode for manual operation.

C. Operator shall include a formed hood enclosing the motor, gearboxes and limit switches.

D. Electric motor shall be of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions at

no more than 75 percent of rated capacity. The motor shall be wound for three phase 208/230

VAC, 60 Hertz operation.

E. Electric Controls: Controls shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and shall be complete

for each door, and built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Incoming electrical shall

be: 208/230VAC 3-phase.

1. Controls shall include a programmable logic controller with digital message display.

Controller shall include programmable close timers and programmable inputs/outputs

2. Motor starters shall be magnetic reversing, factory wired with overload and under voltage

protection, and equipped with mechanical interlocks. All control components shall be

enclosed in one enclosure with a wiring diagram placed on the inside of the cover.

3. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 with disconnect switch.

4. Pushbuttons (interior) for each door shall have one momentary pressure three-button

push-button station marked “OPEN”, “CLOSE” and “STOP”. Push button enclosure shall

be NEMA 4.

5. Limit switches shall be provided to stop the travel of the door in its fully open or fully

closed position. Provide cremone bolt limit switch to be used for HVAC or exhaust

removal system.

6. Safety edges: Provide electric safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse door

upon contact with obstruction.

7. Photo eyes: Provide (1) exterior, jamb mounted, thru-beam type photo eyes, NEMA 4

rated.

8. (Option) Radio controls: Provide one (1) radio receiver and (1) single button remotes per

door. Remotes to open and close doors with single button.

F. Wiring: Door manufacturer shall supply controls and components only. Electrical contractor

shall install controls and furnish and install conduits and wiring for jobsite power and control

wiring.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. For folding doors supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of

specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices. Furnish installers of other work with

templates and drawings indicating locations of anchorage devices and similar items.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in strict accordance with the approved drawings by qualified door erection crews.

All door openings shall be completely prepared by the general contractor prior to the installation

of the doors. Permanent or temporary electric wiring shall be brought to the door opening before

installation is started and shall be completed so as not to delay the inspection test.

B. Doors shall be set plumb, level, and square, and with all parts properly fastened and mounted.

All moving parts shall be tested and adjusted and left in good operating condition.


A. Adjust units to ensure smooth, quiet operation without warping or binding. Adjust hardware to

function smoothly. Confirm that latches engage accurately and securely without forcing or

binding.

B. Clean surfaces and repaint abraded or damaged finished surfaces to match factory-applied

finish.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fire-rated folding doors.



SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1

SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrically operated sectional overhead fire apparatus bay doors.


1. Section 012300 "Alternates" for procedures handling alternate products.

2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,

profile door sections, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in

manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed

on structure.

4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.





approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this

Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that



a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Failure of components or operators before reaching required number of operation

cycles.

c. Faulty operation of hardware.

d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use; rust through.

e. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show

evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

C. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified

without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in

construction.

B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.

1. Design Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of +33.0 psf inward and -44.0

psf outward, minimum.

2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330.

3. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without

evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.

a. Deflection of door sections in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of

the door width.

b. Deflection of horizontal track assembly shall not exceed 1/240 of the door height.



4. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under

uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf/sq. ft. wind load, acting inward and

outward.

C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide glazed sectional doors that pass missile-impact

and cyclic-pressure tests according to ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3.

1. Large Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet of grade.

D. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.

2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to

DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.



the following:

a. Amarr Garage Doors.

b. Arm-R-Lite.

c. C.H.I. Overhead Doors.

d. Clopay Building Products.

e. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties.

f. Haas Door.

g. Harmann LLC.

h. Martin Door Manufacturing.

i. Overhead Door Corporation.

j. Raynor.

k. Rite-Hite Corporation.

l. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

m. Windsor Door.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than

50,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the

fully open position and returned to the closed position.
















C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested according to

ASTM E 283.

D. Thermal Values: Calculated R-value of 26; U-value of 0.038; Installed U-Factor: 0.14 Btu/hr/SF

degrees F.

E. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60 zinc coating.

1. Section Thickness: 3 inches.

2. Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness: 0.015-inch- nominal coated thickness.

a. Surface: Manufacturer's standard, textured.

3. Insulation: Foamed in place.

4. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with a nominal coated

thickness of manufacturer's recommended dimension to comply with performance

requirements.

F. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track.

G. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door.

H. Windows: Approximately 25 by 13 inches and spaced apart the approximate distance as

indicated on Drawings; in two row(s) at height indicated on Drawings; installed with glazing of

the following type:

1. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside and

outside, with cylinders.

J. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.

K. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day.

2. Operator Type: Manufacturer's standard for door requirements.

3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use.

4. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry.

5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type.

6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor and electric sensor edge

on bottom section.

a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black.

7. Control Station: Interior-side mounted where indicated on Drawings.

8. Other Equipment: Portable, radio-control system.



2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.4 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS

A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel

(CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness.

1. Fabricate section faces from single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches

high and of indicated thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous,

interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weather-resistant seal, with a

reinforcing flange return.

2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction,

separating the exterior and interior faces of door.

B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles

formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- nominal coated thickness and

welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- thick

galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more

than 48 inches apart.

C. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen

door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to

depth and bolted or welded in place.

D. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.

E. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's

standard polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and

pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to

ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections and the interior facing

material, with no exposed insulation.

F. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet,

complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated thickness.

G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and

free of warp, twist, and deformation.

2.5 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized

for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on Drawings,

Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support

of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and loading.

1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, minimum G60 zinc coating.



2. Slope tracks at an angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs

when door unit is closed.

3. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track without

sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of

track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device.

a. For Vertical Track: Intermittent, jamb brackets attached to track and attached to

wall.

b. For Horizontal Track: Continuous reinforcing angle from curve in track to end of

track, attached to track and supported at points by laterally braced attachments to

overhead structural members.

B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of

flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type, size, and in arrangement indicated.

Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors and elastic

glazing compound for wood doors, as required. Provide removable stops of same material as

door-section frames.

2.6 HARDWARE

A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or

other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated

thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written

recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts

and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts

is impossible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors more than 16 feet wide

unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with

varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double

hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- diameter roller tires for 3-inchwide track and 2-inch-

diameter roller tires for 2-inchwide track.

2.7 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" and keyed to

building keying system.

2. Keys: Three for each cylinder.

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage

power supply when door is locked.



2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs

fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion

shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles

indicated.

B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on

torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance

mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft.

Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional

brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is

recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Cables: Galvanized-steel, multistrand, lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1.

D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to

bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either

lifting cable breaks.

E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the

wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

F. Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening

operation.

2.9 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by

door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor

and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake,

clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories

required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70.

2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with

NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than

number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains,

and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor for motor exposure indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Polyphase.

b. Volts: 208 V.

c. Hertz: 60.



2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate,

and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec.

and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring:

Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other

electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

E. Limit Switches: Equip motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls

and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F. Obstruction Detection Device: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic

safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately

stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in

door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

2. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather

stripping mounted to bottom section. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to

control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-

button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure, push-button

control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-

purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered door with capability for emergency

manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not

exceed 25 lbf.

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect

mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency

manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount

mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent

motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch

adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

K. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with

regulatory requirements for accessibility.

L. Portable, Radio-Control System: Consisting of two of the following:

1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door.

2. Portable control device to open and stop door may be momentary-contact type; control to

close door shall be sustained- or constant-pressure type.

3. Remote antenna and mounting kit.




A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.




2.11 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of

prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions

for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,

inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and

as specified.

B. Tracks:

1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24

inches apart.

2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel

hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing,

diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-

operating equipment.

C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in

compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.



2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of

warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather-resistant fit around entire perimeter.

D. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded

galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.

2. Storefront framing for window walls.

3. Storefront framing for punched openings.

4. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing."




and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,

sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-

framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.

c. Expansion provisions.

d. Glazing.

e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard

sizes.



D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to

ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.


A. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories,

and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-

framed entrance and storefront.

B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance

manuals.




B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated

by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they

relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to

Architect for review.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.



d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or

replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within


1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:





PART 2 - PRODUCTS



"Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this

Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in

construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term

creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.

c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

e. Failure of operating units.

C. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind

speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2 - Analytical

Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

1. Basic Wind Speed: 131 mph

2. Importance Factor: 1.15

3. Exposure Category: B

4. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind

load design pressures of +33.0 lbs./sq. ft. inward and -44.0 lbs./sq. ft. outward, minimum.



D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to

glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite

or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch,

whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,

whichever is smaller.

a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing

members and operable units.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24

lbf/sq. ft.

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested

according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-

load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


2. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on

building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design

displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to AAMA 1503 as

follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor

of not more than 0.47 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain

coefficient of no greater than 0.35.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a condensation

resistance rating of no less than 70.



I. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested

according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes:


2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer North

America, Trifab® VG 451T framing system or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Arcadia, Inc.

2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.

3. CMI Architectural.

4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.

5. EFCO Corporation.

6. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.

7. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.

8. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.

9. TRACO.

10. Tubelite.

11. United States Aluminum.

12. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system,

including framing spandrel panels and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

3. Glazing Plane: Front.

4. Finish: Clear anodic finish.

5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not

integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:
















1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.

b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.

c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation

and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in

SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with

reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate

concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum

members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100

"Door Hardware."

B. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements in

this Section.

1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and

products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

3. Opening-Force Requirements:



a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbfto

set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum

required width.

b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.

C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive

qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware

Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:

1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and

requirements for description, quality, and function.

D. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door

leaf.

E. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

F. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

G. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing

according to UL 305.

H. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control

number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".

I. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for

aluminum framing.

J. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

K. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as

required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to

comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.

L. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.

M. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

N. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location

indicated, with integral rubber bumper.

O. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287,

molded PVC.



P. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners

on mounting strip.

Q. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

R. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with

maximum height of 1/2 inch.

2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

3. When using exposed fasteners, use countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match

framing system.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate

fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials

and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or

grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.



5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and

for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install

three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames

for pairs of doors.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable

strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest

extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying

finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to

Shop Drawings.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed

metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.



5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose

or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200

"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust

weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed

fasteners to greatest extent possible.


A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the

following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to

1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch

wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or

more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.



UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 1

SECTION 086200 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed curb mount unit skylight with formed curb counterflashing for mounting on

prefabricated roof curbs, for low-slope roofing applications.




A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight.


and profiles, and finishes for unit skylights.

B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and

other adjoining work.

C. Pultruded Frame Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section

of each unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size.

D. Aluminum Finish Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section

of each unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size.

E. Glazing Samples: For each color and finish of glazing indicated, 12 inches square and of same

thickness indicated for the final Work.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type and size of unit skylight, for tests performed within the last

four years by a qualified testing agency. Test results based on testing of smaller unit skylights

than specified will not be accepted.

C. Field quality-control reports.



D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or

exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion

in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of

units required for this Project.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that



a. Uncontrolled water leakage.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

c. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Velux America, Inc. 104 Ben Casey Drive, Fort Mill, SC 29708; (800) 888-

3589, model VMS Longlight. Subject to compliance with requirements, equal products by one

of the following are acceptable:

1. Acralight International.

2. American Skylites Inc.

3. Auburn Skylights.

4. Bristolite Daylighting Systems, Inc.

5. C/S Groups.

6. CPI International.

7. Dur-Red Products.

8. Energy-Glazed Systems, Inc.

9. Exarc Skylights, Inc.

10. Fiore Skylights, Inc.

11. Fox Lite, Inc.

12. Hi Pro International, Inc.

13. Kalwall Corporation.



14. Lane-Aire Manufacturing Corp.


A. Structural framing of sufficient sizes to support design loads as prescribed by governing

building codes.

B. Uniform Load Structural ASTM E 330 maximum uplift 100psf as tested. NAFS-11 Rating

65psf

C. Uniform Load structural ASTM E 330 maximum download 125 psf as tested. NAFS-11 Rating

60psf

D. Air Infiltration at 1.57psf static pressure limited to .01 CFM/ft2 when tested in accordance with

ASTM E283

E. Water Penetration: No water penetration shall occur when the system is tested in accordance

with ASTM E331 up to 15psf. Water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled

water other than condensation on the interior surface of any part of the skylight.

F. Self-Ignition Temperature ASTM D 1929 for pultruded composite VMS frame: 500 degrees

Celsius as tested

G. Flash Ignition Temperature ASTM D 1929 for pultruded composite VMS frame 410 degrees

Celsius as tested

H. Average Smoke Density Rating ASTM D 2843 7.0 as tested

I. Linear Rate of Burn ASTM D 635 Class CC1 as tested

J. Burning Brand Test ASTM E 108 Class B burning brand passed as tested

K. Acoustics Testing ASTM E 90 calculated by ASTM E 413 STC Interior Noise 37 as tested

L. Acoustics Testing ASTM E 90 calculated by ASTM E 1332 QITC 28 exterior noise as tested

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Frame and sash in pultruded composite material consisting of 20% fiberglass and 80% two-part

polyurethane resin with water-based two component clear coating and white base RAL color

9010, gloss 30.

B. Extruded aluminum retention caps.

C. Flashing:

1. Custom prefabricated aluminum sheet shall be the required alloy and temper to make

compatible with the specified finish, with a minimum thickness of 1mm

2. Front surface: polyamide polyester lacquer in color: NCS standard color S 7500-N

3. Aluminum flashing should be provided with 50mm EPS insulation bonded to the back of

the flashing.



4. Pre-fitted wind and snow stop bonded to back of flashing base.

D. Bracket Fasteners:

1. Galvanized low-carbon steel for cold forming, galvanized structural steel, high-strength

low-alloy steel, galvanized free-cutting steel and sealed passivated cast zinc.

2. Bracket are pre-installed to modules.

3. Bracket to mount to single steel flange per instruction and tolerance of modular skylight

manufacture. The modular skylight system shall not require any cutting, drilling, welding

or soldering.

4. Steel components are electroplated according to European Norm EN ISO 2081:2008

table A1-C iridescent.

E. Sealant:

1. All required sealants are factory pre-applied to the modular skylight system. Additional

sealants should not be required during installation.

F. Finish:

1. Extruded aluminum cladding 1.5mm thick, scratch resistant powder lacquer (60-120 my).

Color is “Noir 2100 Sable YW” Akzo Nobel with Kynar 500

2. Pultruded interior frame and sash finish is a water based two component clear coating in

white base RAL color 9010, gloss 30

G. Glazing:

1. All glazing units include an 8mm toughened outer pane and a 3+3 or 5+5 mm safety

inner pane with 2 layers of 0.38 mm interlayer PVB foil.

2. All glazing units are filled with argon gas.

3. All glazing units consist of a chromatic warm edge spacer and are produced with warm

edge technology to minimize the risk of condensation at the pane edges to provide the

glazing units with the most durable insulation capabilities.

4. Double glazing:

a. IGU 11: Sun1: 8H Sun1-20Argon-33.2F / 55.2F Low-E

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other

noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match

material being fastened.

1. Provide non-removable fastener heads.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness

per coat.



2.5 FABRICATION

A. All custom engineered Modular Skylight components must be manufactured, fitted and

assembled in the manufacturer’s facilities.

B. Modular components to be marked and packed for delivery and properly sequenced installation

of modules.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Prior to starting installation, the skylight erector shall inspect related construction to verify that

they are properly prepared in accordance with the approved shop drawings. No work shall

proceed until all errors and deviations are corrected.

B. The skylight framing is designed to be self-supporting between the support construction. The

skylights will impose reactions to the support construction. All adjacent and support

construction must support the transfer of all loads including horizontal and vertical, exerted by

the skylights. Design or structural engineering services for the supporting structure or building

components not included in the skylight scope are not included under this section.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. The modular skylight shall be erected and glazed by an experienced and authorized installer

familiar with the manufacturer’s systems and installation procedures.

B. All modular components shall be clearly marked for sequencing of modular installation.

C. All electrical components and connections shall be clearly marked and provided to electrical

contractor for required connections.

D. The manufacturer shall provide instructions to the General Contractor for cleaning of all

surfaces.

E. Protection and final cleaning of modular skylight system shall be the responsibility of the

General Contractor.

F. Furnishing of temporary covering and weather-proofing of the skylight openings, if required, is

by the General Contractor, and removal of the protective measures during and after the skylight

installation is excluded by the manufacturer and the manufacturer’s erector. Temporary covers

shall not interfere with the installation of the skylight in any way.

G. Protection of persons or property below the skylight will be provided by the general contractor,

including barricades and traffic control.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. All parts of the work, when completed, shall be within the following tolerances:



1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop drawings: 1/8-in. per

12-ft. length, or 1/2-in. in total length.

2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end-to-end, edge-

to-edge in line or separated by less than 3-in.:1/32-in.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but

before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Perform test for total area of each unit skylight.

D. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up

damaged metal coatings and finishes.

B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged

during construction period.

D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations.



DOOR HARDWARE 087111-1

SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.

2. Storefront and entrance door hardware.

3. Card Access control system.

4. Power supplies for electric hardware.

5. Cylinders for doors fabricated with locking hardware.

6. Wiring and riser diagrams for electric hardware.


1. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”.

2. Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

3. Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors”.

4. Section 084113 “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.

C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.

1. Windows.

2. Lockers.

3. Toilet accessories, including grab bars.

4. Rough hardware.

5. Access doors and panels, except cylinders where detailed.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.

B. American National Standards Institute – ANSI 156.18 – Materials and Finishes.

C. ANSI A117.1 – Specifications for making buildings and facilities usable by physically

handicapped people

D. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990

E. BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

F. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute



G. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows

2. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

3. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

4. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

H. UL – Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL10C – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Positive Pressure)

2. UL 305 – Panic Hardware

I. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated

J. SDI – Steel Door Institute

K. WDI – Wood Door Institute

L. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute

M. NAAM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

1.4 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Submit six copies of schedule per Division 1. Organize vertically formatted schedule into

“Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every

item required for each door or opening. Include following information:

1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.

2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.Name, part number and manufacturer of

each item

3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

4. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.

5. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

6. Mounting locations for hardware.

7. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.

8. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone

number.

9. Catalog cuts.

10. Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for electronic hardware.

11. Date of jobsite visit.

B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.

C. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Include product data and indicate

benefit to the Project. Furnish operating samples on request.

1. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet

existing standard.



2. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying

schedule, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance

information, and supplier’s final inspection report


A. Qualifications:

1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified architectural

hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course Work for project

hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and Contractor.

a. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

B. Hardware: New, free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware

(latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.

C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special

knowledge or effort

D. Fire-Rated Openings: In compliance with NFPA 80. Hardware UL10C/UBC-7-2 (positive

pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching

hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, plus resilient and required

intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete.

1. Note: scheduled seals may exceed selected door manufacturer’s requirements. See 2.6.E

for clarification.

E. Pre-Installation Meetings: Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades,

coordinate materials and techniques, and sequence complex hardware items and systems

installation. Convene at least one week prior to commencement of related work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).

1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner’s representative.

B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers,

complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents,

locations in hardware schedule and door numbers.

C. Storage: Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint,

chemicals, etc.


A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members

requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical as the same operation

and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval.



1.8 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate with:

1. Concrete placement.

2. Reinforcement in walls.

3. Finish floor materials.

4. Floor-mounted hardware.

5. Conduit and raceways as needed for electrical and electronic hardware items.

6. Fire/life-safety system interfacing.

7. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades.

B. Furnish manufacturer templates to door and frame fabricators.

C. Use hardware consultant to check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that

adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation.

1. Confirm that door manufacturers furnish necessary UBC-7-2 compliant seal packages.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’ warranties:

1. Closers: Ten years mechanical, two years electrical.

2. Exit Devices: Three years.

3. Hinges: Life of Building.

4. Other Hardware: Two years.

1.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Test door hardware operation with climate control system at rest and while in full operation.

B. Test electrical and electronic hardware systems for satisfactory operation.

C. Test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: submit for review products with equivalent function

and features of scheduled products.

ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE SUB:

Hinges (IVE) Ives Bommer, Stanley

Continuous Hinges (IVE) Ives Zero, Stanley

Key System (BST) Best Per Section 2.9

Locks (SCH) Schlage Per Section 2.3

Exit Devices (VD) Von Duprin Per Sections 2.3 & 2.4

Closers (LCN) LCN Sargent 280 series

Flush Bolts (IVE) Ives DCI, BBW



Silencers (IVE) Ives Rockwood, BBW

Kickplates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, BBW

Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson Rixson

Thresholds (NGP) Nat’l Guard Pemko, Reese

Seals & Bottoms (NGP) Nat’l Guard Pemko, Reese

B. Provide hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with these specifications

and manufacturers’ instructions.

1. Include items inadvertently omitted from this specification. Note these items in submittal

for review.

2. Where scheduled item is now obsolete, bid and furnish manufacturers updated item at no

additional cost to the project.

2.2 HANGING MEANS

A. Conventional Hinges: Hinge open widths minimum, but, of sufficient throw to permit

maximum door swing. Steel or stainless steel pins and concealed bearings.

1. Three hinges per leaf to 7 foot, 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in

height, or any fraction thereof.

2. Extra heavy weight hinges on doors over 3 foot, 5 inches in width.

3. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins.

4. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions.

5. Provide shims and shimming instructions for proper door adjustment.

2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS

A. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled

1. Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through-bolted

2. Locking Spindle: stainless steel, interlocking design

3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant plated steel, or

stainless steel

4. Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported, minimum 2"

clearance from lever mid-point to door face

5. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid

6. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box construction, lips of

sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing

7. Lock Series and Design: Schlage ND series, "Sparta" design

8. Certifications

a. ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1

b. UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4ft x 8ft.

2.4 EXIT DEVICES/PANIC HARDWARE

A. General features:

1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.



2. Push-through touch pad design. No exposed touch bar fasteners, no exposed cavities

when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus

anti-rattle devices.

3. ¾” throw deadlocking latchbolts.

4. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.

5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no

extra parts required to effect change of function.

6. Releasable with 32 lb. maximum pressure under 250 lb. load to the door.

B. Specific features:

1. Non-Fire Rated Devices: cylinder dogging.

2. Lever Trim: Breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130” thickness,

match lockset lever design.

3. Rod and latch guards with surface vertical rod devices.

4. Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod devices

less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled.

5. Impact recessed devices:

6. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric latch retraction

devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies, monitoring

switches and controls

2.5 CLOSERS

A. General: One manufacturer for closer units throughout the Work, including surface closers,

high security closers, overhead concealed closers, floor closers, low-energy door operators and

electromagnetic hold-open closers.

B. Surface Closers: (4011/4111)

1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body.

Double heat treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.

2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.

3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.

4. Thru-bolts and wood doors unless doors are provided with closer blocking. Non-sized

and adjustable. Place closers inside building, stairs and rooms.

5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header,

door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.

6. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 lb., interior doors 5 lb., labeled fire doors 15 lb.

7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve

for delayed action where scheduled.

8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.

9. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on

request.

10. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F to

–30 degrees F, furnish data on request.

11. Non-flaming fluid will not fuel door or floor covering fires.



2.6 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE

A. Sliding Door Hardware: Provide complete sets of rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor

guides, and accessories indicated.

B. Standards: Manufacturer shall conform to:

1. Sliding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14

C. Barn Door Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 150 lbs.

D. Basis of Design Manufacturer/Product:

1. Hager Companies – 9710 without fascia.

2.7 OTHER HARDWARE

A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design, “LBR” type.

B. Overhead Stops: Stainless steel (450 & 900 series). Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal

end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

C. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as

scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.

D. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners.

Where wall type cannot be used, provide overhead type.

E. Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: solid high-grade

neoprene. UL label applied to seals on rated doors.

1. Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL III, Grade 40.

2. Non-corroding fasteners at in-swinging exterior doors.

3. Sound control openings: Use components tested as a system using nationally accepted

standards by independent laboratories. Ensure that the door leafs have the necessary

sealed-in-place STC ratings. Adhesive mounted components not acceptable. Fasten

applies seals over bead of sealant.

4. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C/UBC-7-2 compliant. Coordinate with selected

door manufacturers and selected frame manufacturer’s requirements. Where rigid housed

resilient seals are scheduled in this section and the selected door manufacturer only

requires an adhesive mounted resilient seal, furnish rigid housed seal at minimum, or

both the rigid housed seal and the adhesive applied seal if necessary to fulfill door

manufacturer’s requirement. Adhesive applied seal alone is deemed insufficient for this

project where rigid housed seals are scheduled.

5. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and

in full compliance with UL10C/UBC-7-2. Furnished by selected door manufacturer, these

seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture. Adhesive applied

intumescent strips are not acceptable, use concealed-in-door-edge type or kerfed-in-frame

type. Careful coordination required.



F. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details.

1. Exterior: Set in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with

requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”. Non-ferrous ¼ inch

fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved

equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).

2. Sound control openings: Set in bed of mastic sealant.

G. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Flat head sleeve

anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts:

full length to prevent door compression.

H. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Omit where

adhesive mounted seal occurs. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes.

2.8 FINISH

A. Generally BHMA 626 Satin Chromium

1. Areas using BHMA 626 to have push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA 630,

Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted.

B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, (BHMA 689) unless otherwise

noted.

C. Aluminum items: match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color.

2.9 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:

A. Key System: Stanley Best Cormax™ keyway, interchangeable core throughout. Key blanks

available only from factory-direct sources, not available from after-market key blank

manufacturers. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with the Owner and the Best representative to

determine system structure. Furnish Owner’s written approval of the system. Construction

keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cylinders/cores.

1. Temporary construction cores to be removed at completion of the job per Owner’s

instructions. Demonstrate that the construction key is no longer operable. Temporary

cores to be returned to hardware supplier and are to remain hardware supplier’s property.

Permanent cores to be installed by the Owner or the General Contractor (with

authorization from the Owner.)

B. Key Cylinders: utility patented, 6 combination pin solid brass construction.

C. Cylinders/cores: keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where permanent records are maintained.

Locks and cylinders of same manufacturer. Provide visual key control (VKC) w/ stamp key

symbol on keys and concealed cylinder stamping (CKC on cylinders).

D. Permanent keys: secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner.

E. Key Transcript List: Secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner upon completion.

Requires a letter of authorization form the Owner.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:

A. Factory trained, certified, and carries a factory-issued card certifying that person as a “Certified

Installer”. Alternative: can demonstrate suitably equivalent competence and experience.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation

B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and

security codes.

1. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering material.

2. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain,

match locations of existing hardware.

C. Existing frames and doors scheduled to receive new hardware: carefully remove existing

hardware, tag and bag, and turn over to Owner.

1. Patch and fill wood frames and doors with solid wood stock or dowel material before

cutting for new hardware. Do not reuse existing screw holes - - fill and re-pilot.

2. Metal doors/frames: Weld or fasten with screws: filler pieces in existing hardware cut-

outs and mortises not scheduled for re-use by new hardware. Leave surfaces smooth - -

no applied patches.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-

mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true

to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and

operation.

1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc.

Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom

pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.

2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement

exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws.

B. Locate floor stops not more than 4 inches from the wall.

C. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.

D. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give to

Owner items not scheduled for reuse.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to

operate freely and smoothly.



1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods to be repaired or

replaced to Owner’s satisfaction.

B. Inspection: Use hardware supplier. Include suppliers with closeout documents.

C. Follow-up inspection: Installer to provide letter of agreement to Owner that approximately 6

months after substantial completion, installer will visit Project with representatives of the

manufacturers of the locking devices and door closers to accomplish following:

1. Re-adjust hardware.

2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instruct

Owner’s personnel.

3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed.

4. Submit written report identifying problems and likely future problems.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate electrical and electronic hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance

procedures.

3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING

A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc.

Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.

B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process.

3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. See following page.


HA

RD

WA

RE

SC

HE

DU

LE

LO

CK

SE

T T

YP

E

OP

G. N

O.

MK

NA

ME

ENTRY

CYLINDER

ELECTRIC STRIKE

OFFICE

PASSAGE

PRIVACY

STOREROOM

CARD READER

EXIT DEVICE

PUSH/PULL

CLOSER

HINGES

BB HINGES

PIVOTS

WALL STOP

KICK PLATE

THRESHOLD/

WTH.STRIP

FLUSH BOLTS

UL LABEL

SET NO.

101

AV

ES

TIB

ULE

xx

xx

xx

xx

1

101

BV

ES

TIB

ULE

xx

xx

xx

x2

102

AT

RA

ININ

Gx

xx

x6

102

BT

RA

ININ

Gx

x10

102

CS

TO

RA

GE

xxx

x19

104

ST

OR

AG

Ex

x16

105

TO

ILE

Tx

xx

xx

12

106

CO

RR

IDO

Rx

xx

xx

x3

107

ST

OR

AG

Ex

x16

108

AK

ITC

HE

N - s

lidin

g d

oor o

n o

verh

ead tra

ck -

21

108

BK

ITC

HE

Nx

xx

xx

xx

x1

109

LO

UN

GE

xx

xx

xx

xx

1

110A

1S

TO

RA

GE

xx

16

110B

1S

TO

RA

GE

xx

16

110C

1S

TO

RA

GE

xx

16

111

TO

ILE

Tx

xx

xx

12

112

JA

NIT

OR

xx

16

113

ST

OR

AG

Ex

xx

17

114

CO

MM

ON

xx

xx

xx

xx

1

115

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

116

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

117

AC

OR

RID

OR

xx

xx

xx

8

117

BC

OR

RID

OR

xx

xx

xx

xx

1

118

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

119

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

120

LA

UN

DR

Yx

xx

11

121

TO

ILE

Tx

xx

x12

122

TO

ILE

Tx

xx

x12

123

AF

ITN

ES

Sx

xx

x9

123

BF

ITN

ES

Sx

xx

xx

xx

x1

124

TO

ILE

Tx

xx

x12

125

TO

ILE

Tx

xx

x12

126

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

127

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

128

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

129

BU

NK

xx

xD

14

130

ST

OR

AG

Ex

xx

x19

131

SE

RV

ER

xx

x7

132

OF

FIC

Ex

xx

7

133

OF

FIC

Ex

xx

7

134

OF

FIC

Ex

xx

7

135

OF

FIC

Ex

xx

7

137

AA

PP

AR

AT

US

BA

Yx

xx

xx

5

137

BA

PP

AR

AT

US

BA

Yx

xx

xx

5

137

FA

PP

AR

AT

US

BA

Yx

xx

xx

x4

138

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

xxx

xx

20

139

IND

US

TR

IAL A

IRx

xx

x19

140

PP

Ex

x16

141

AT

OIL

ET

xx

xx

12

141

BT

OIL

ET

xx

x13

142

DE

CO

Nx

xx

x15

143

WO

RK

xx

x17

144

RIS

ER

xx

x18


GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites and storefront framing.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and

face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Samples for verification purposes of 12 inch square samples of each type of glass indicated

except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12 inch long samples of each color required

(except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket

sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

C. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products

comply with specified requirements.

D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing

materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant

manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and

recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

E. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass

edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants,

glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.

F. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing

compliance with requirements specified.

G. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance

Manual specified in Division 1.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who

are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's

"Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing

with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and

safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or

other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the

Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to


GLAZING 088000 - 3

and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the

Contract Documents.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 5 years after date of


B. Manufacturer’s Warranty on Laminated Glass: Submit written warranty signed by insulating

glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those laminated glass units that

deteriorate as defined in the “Definitions” article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed

Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only

deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning

practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 5 years after date of


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each

glass type.

1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and

under conditions indicated.

1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according

to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Basic Wind Speed: 131 mph

b. Importance Factor: 1.15

c. Exposure Category: B

d. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding

wind load design pressures of +33.0 lbs./sq. ft. inward and -44.0 lbs./sq. ft.

outward.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes acting on glazing framing members and glazing components.



GLAZING 088000 - 4

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall conform to basic-protection testing

requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test

specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project

and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade.

D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with

16 CFR 1201, Category II.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float

glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened, glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-

treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated

float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.4 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and

Quality q3 (glazing select).

1. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated, all interior windows and interior sheet of

insulated exterior windows.

2. Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing) at exterior surface sheets.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Primary Tinted Float Glass Class 2: 1/4" thickness

a. Tint: Equivalent to PPG Solargray.

b. Visible Light Transmittance: 44%.

c. Shading Coefficient: .67.

d. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 6%

e. U-Value Winter: 1.02.

f. U-Value Summer: 0.93.

g. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.58.

C. Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of

assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light

transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.

2.5 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS

A. Uncoated, Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (uncoated glass),

Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and light-reducing), Quality q3

(glazing select), with tint color and performance characteristics for 6.0-mm-thick (0.23-inch-

thick) glass matching those indicated for annealed primary tinted float glass; kind as indicated

below:

1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

heat-treated glass products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following companies.

1. Advanced Glass Systems Corp.

2. Guardian Industries Corp.

3. PPG Industries, Inc.

4. LOF, Libbey-Owens-Ford Co.

5. Viracon, Inc.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

2.6 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass

separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements

indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section.

1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified

elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass

products comprising lites of insulating glass units.

2. Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,

Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with

system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety

glass is designated or required.

3. Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal values

based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick

and nominal 1/2-inch dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated.

4. U-values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq.ft. x deg F.

B. Construction Characteristics:

1. Air Space Width: Nominal ½ inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites

at unit’s edge.

2. Gas Filling: Fill air space with argon.

3. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: manufacturer’s standard

sealants.

4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer’s standard.

5. Desiccant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.

6. Corner Construction: Manufacturer’s standard corner construction.

7. Color of Spacer: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

C. Glass Specifications (storefronts):

1. Insulating glazing on this project shall be Low ‘E’ coated, tinted outdoor lite, with argon

filled cavity. Insulating glazing product shall be equal to PPG Solarban 70XL +

Solargray.

2. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm (0.23 inch).

3. Low E coated Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass with coating on #2 surface.

4. Outdoor Lite: Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing) float glass with tint

color: PPG Solarban 70XL or equivalent.

5. Performance of Insulated Glass: (performance values published are manufacturer’s

recommended values for insulated glass.)

a. Visible light transmission: 34%.

b. Shading coefficient: 0.23.

c. U-value: 0.28 winter, 0.36 summer.

d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.20.

2.7 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to

maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:


GLAZING 088000 - 7

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application

indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product

manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance

requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so

that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible

marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or

impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances

and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant

width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of

tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.


GLAZING 088000 - 9

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and

installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners

and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket

manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of

dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,

remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for

inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in

writing by glass manufacturer.



MIRRORS 088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.

2. Tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.



1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of

silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating

components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment

details.

C. Samples: For each type of the following:

1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges.

2. Mirror Clips: Full size.

3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic.



A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent

damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or

other causes.


MIRRORS 088300 - 2

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling

mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass

surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified

warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that

are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to

manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of

the silver film.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company.

2. Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc.

3. D & W Incorporated.

4. Donisi Mirror Company.

5. Gardner Glass, Inc.

6. Gilded Mirrors, Inc.

7. Glasswerks LA, Inc.

8. Guardian Glass; SunGuard.

9. Head West.

10. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc.

11. Lenoir Mirror Company.

12. National Glass Industries.

13. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc.

14. Sunshine Mirror.

15. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.

16. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.

17. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single

source.


MIRRORS 088300 - 3

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503.

B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality, ultraclear (low-iron) float glass

with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission.

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.

C. Tempered Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality for blemish requirements and complying with

ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied;

clear.

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.

D. Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products that comply with

16 CFR 1201, Category II.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for

use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting

mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating

and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing

channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges

of mirrors in a single piece.

1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8

inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.

2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in

height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.

3. Finish: Clear bright anodized.

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in

finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide

toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized

anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.


MIRRORS 088300 - 4

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible.

B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and

size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat high-polished.

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or

atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

D. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing

paint, as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer, to produce a surface free of

bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for

compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting


B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing

finishes or primers with mirror mastic.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of

substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where

applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with

referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids

distorting reflected images.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips

for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air

circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.


MIRRORS 088300 - 5

C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting

surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install

fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from

condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections

that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by

mirror manufacturer.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and

exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof

trusses.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Seismic Performance: Non-structural metal framing systems shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.15.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of




B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless


2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0195 inch

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products from the available

manufactures that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing

b. MBA Building Supplies

c. Steel Network Inc. (The)

d. Superior Metal Trim

e. Telling Industries

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with

movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly

indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of

studs.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products from the available

manufactures that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Fire Trak Corp.

b. Grace Construction Products

c. Metal-Lite, Inc.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width

indicated.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=226&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456814681&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd





2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire,

or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-

resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and

capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by

construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent

testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053

inch and minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.


3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.



4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.


G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system

composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.



a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.

c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.







2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal

frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building

structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and

that hangers will develop their full strength.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy

trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.



D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above

ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to

underside of solid structure.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.



2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,

and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching

to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or

otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.

7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems

meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other

and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet

measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between

parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls and soffits.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold

damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an

independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Source: Products manufactured in China are not acceptable.

B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD



1. American Gypsum.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

4. Lafarge North America Inc.

5. National Gypsum Company.

6. PABCO Gypsum.

7. Temple-Inland.

8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



E. Moisture-and-Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and

mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.












1. Core: 5/8 inch and Type X where indicated.


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's

standard edges.



a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.

2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.


B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's

standard edges.



a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.

b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard.

c. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.

d. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.

e. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker.

f. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.

g. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.



2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

f. Expansion (control) joint.

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.














2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate.

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag

wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of




E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer

present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels

not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow

1/4- to 3/8-inchwide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inchwide spaces at these locations and trim edges



with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting

structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings

and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both

faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with

manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking

paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily

installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.

4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end

joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers

vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring

member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer

joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger

joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with

screws.



3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where

panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a

uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 3: Not Used.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

5. Level 5: Not Used.

E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.



F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Fiber cement soffits: Paint.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall

application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile.

2. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications.

3. Stone thresholds.

4. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

3. Section 093023 "Glass Tiling" for glass tile products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1

apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,

ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,

ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications

for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.




1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.





B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile

manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of

Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.

2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman

Certification.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact

until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.



D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or

producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent

quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality

for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate

from single source or producer.



1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and

aggregate, from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this

Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Stone thresholds.

2. Cementitious backer units.

3. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,

compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced

by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements

specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and

package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard

with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dal-Tile

Corporation, Veranda Solids series, or comparable products by one of the following:

1. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.

2. American Olean Corporation.

3. Crossville, Inc.

4. Florida Tile, Inc.

5. Florim USA.

6. Interceramic.

7. Iris US.

8. Porcelanite.

9. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

10. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.

2.4 TILE PRODUCTS, TYPES

A. Porcelain Ceramic Tile Type (TL-1): Dal-Tile Corporation, Ayers Rock, glazed porcelain tile.

1. Face Size: 13 by 13 inches.




3. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges.

4. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.60.

5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Rustic Remnant AY05.

6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tile Type (TL-2): Dal-Tile Corporation, Ayers Rock, glazed porcelain

tile.





5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Majestic Mound AY04.


C. Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tile Type (TL-3): Dal-Tile Corporation, Ayers Rock, glazed porcelain

tile.

1. Face Size: 6-1/2 by 6-1/2 inches.




5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Majestic Mount AY04.


D. Ceramic Floor Tile Type (TL-4): Dal-Tile Corporation, Ayers Rock, glazed porcelain tile.





5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Majestic Mound AY04.


a. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4-inch by 20-inch.

b. External Corners: Field-butted square corners.

c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.

E. Ceramic Wall Tile Type (WTL-2): Dal-Tile Corporation, Elevare Solids, glazed porcelain tile.





5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Crater EL41.


7. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,

selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4-inch by 20-inch.



b. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4-inch by 20-inch.

c. External Corners: Field-butted square corners.

d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.

F. Ceramic Wall Tile Type (WTL-3): Dal-Tile Corporation, Natural hues on Eco-Body Solids,

glazed porcelain tile.





5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Real Teal QH66.


7. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,

selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4-inch by 20-inch.

b. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4-inch by 20-inch.

c. External Corners: Field-butted square corners.

d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.

G. Ceramic Wall Tile Type (WTL-4): Dal-Tile Corporation, Elevare.


2. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Crater EL41, S-44D9 (bullnose).

H. Ceramic Wall Base Tile Type (TLBS-1): Dal-Tile Corporation, Natural hues on Eco-Body

Solids, glazed porcelain tile.





5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Leather P506, #S-36E9T.


I. Ceramic Wall Base Tile Type (TLBS-2): Dal-Tile Corporation, Veranda Solids, glazed

porcelain tile.





5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Majestic Mount AY04.




2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is

recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and

accessories recommended by manufacturer.

2.6 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between

adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above

adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of

threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 according

to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.

1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.

2.7 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Ardex Americas.

2. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company.

3. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.

4. Bostik, Inc.

5. C-Cure.

6. Custom Building Products.

7. Jamo Inc.

8. Laticrete International, Inc.

9. MAPEI Corporation.

10. Merkrete Systems; Parex USA, Inc.

11. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

12. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

13. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.

C. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic

additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

D. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in

addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.8 GROUT MATERIALS

A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.





1. Ardex Americas.



4. Bostik, Inc.

5. C-Cure.


7. Jamo Inc.






C. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form,

prepackaged with other dry ingredients.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations

indicated.

B. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic

or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring

applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.



the following:

a. Blanke Corporation.

b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.

c. Schluter Systems L.P.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout

manufacturers.

E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change

color or appearance of grout.



a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.

b. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer.




c. Jamo Inc.; Surfaceguard Sealer.

d. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Grout Sealer.

e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal.

f. TEC, H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.; Grout Guard Plus Penetrating Grout

Sealer.

2. Grout sealers shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout

manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance

characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for



1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other

substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances

required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with

surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or

grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset

mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-

setting material manufacturer.



B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar

bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA

installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the

ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA

installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and

grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile floors in wet areas.

b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are

flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize

the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same

size, align joints.

2. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on

floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.



I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above

them.

J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless


K. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other

flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.

L. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove

excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written

instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material

unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to

produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or

setting materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new

matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are

free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended

by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by

testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and

plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and

after cleaning.



3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to

prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral

protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is

completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from

tile surfaces.

3.8 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.

a. Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.

b. Grout: High-performance unsanded grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W243; thinset mortar on gypsum board.



2. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on

cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

a. Thinset Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.


C. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA B415; thinset mortar on waterproof membrane over

cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.





GLASS TILING 093023 - 1

SECTION 093023 - GLASS TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass tile.

2. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

3. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic tile products

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1

apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,

ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,

ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications

for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.




1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.





B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile

manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of

Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.

2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman

Certification.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact

until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.2 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.



D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type from single source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent

quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality

for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate

from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and

aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain waterproof membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting

and grouting materials.



C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this

Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Waterproof membrane.

2. Cementitious backer units.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Glass Tile Standard: Provide glass tile that complies with ANSI A137.2 for types and

other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced

by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements

specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and

package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard

with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile

assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is

suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Glass Tile Type WTL-1: Glass Wall Tile Type

1. Sizing Category: Standard.

2. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range Daltile

Luterlocking, Mosaic.

3. Grout Color: Winter Blue CW 27.

4. Size: 12 by 18 inches

2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is

recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and

accessories recommended by manufacturer.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.





1. Ardex Americas.



4. Bostik, Inc.

5. C-Cure.


7. Jamo Inc.



10. Merkrete Systems; Parex USA, Inc.




C. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic

additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

D. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in

addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.



1. Ardex Americas.



4. Bostik, Inc.

5. C-Cure.


7. Jamo Inc.






C. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form,

prepackaged with other dry ingredients.


A. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness; stainless-

steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.





the following:

a. Blanke Corporation.

b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.

c. Schluter Systems L.P.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout

manufacturers.

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change

color or appearance of grout.



a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.

b. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer.

c. Jamo Inc.; Surfaceguard Sealer.

d. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Grout Sealer.

e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal.

f. TEC, H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.; Grout Guard Plus Penetrating Grout

Sealer.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout

manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance

characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for



1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other

substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances

required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.




2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar

bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 GLASS TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA

installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the

ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA

installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and

grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are

flush.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize

the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise

indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Mosaic Glass Tile: 1/8 inch.

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.



H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above

them.

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated.

J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written

instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer

from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to

produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or

setting materials over it.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of

foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended

by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by

testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and

plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and

after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer

and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent

drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to

prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral

protective cleaner to completed tile walls.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from

tile surfaces.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.



B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,

prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples

of each type, finish, and color.

C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system, from ICC-ES.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they

will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized

moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed

and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,



and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for

Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions


B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension

system from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical

ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of

test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each

product type.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: (ACT) Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ultima ™

Tegular #1911 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or comparable product by

one of the following:


2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

3. Tectum Inc.

4. USG Interiors, Inc.



B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as

follows:

1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2.

2. Pattern: E (lightly textured).

3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A.

C. Characteristics:

1. Color: White.

2. LR: Not less than 0.90.

3. NRC: Not less than 0.70.

4. CAC: Not less than 35.

5. Edge/Joint Detail: SLB.


7. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

D. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels

treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,

mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or

bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to

ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

content not less than 25 percent.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with

applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft

temper.

2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.

3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but

provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire.

E. Seismic Braces and Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic braces and clips designed and

spaced to secure grid and acoustical panels in place.



2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Prelude® XL HRC

as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or comparable product by one of the

following:


2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

3. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll

formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip

galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation;

with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.

2. Face Design: Flat, flush.

3. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.

4. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant.

b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.

c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective

in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building

construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.

2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,

synthetic-rubber sealant.

3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).










PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical

panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified

in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel

ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture

damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic

design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's

"Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard

suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in

form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not

deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten

hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or

power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,

install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of

each member.



10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,

precise fit.

1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of

reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed

panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel

manufacturer.

3. Install clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for

fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written

instructions unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and

suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and

touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be

successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

2. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and

pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

C. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated

on Drawings.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time

periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE (RB-1)

A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite

Ecolibrium or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:

1. AB; American Biltrite.

2. Allstate Rubber Corp.

3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

4. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.

5. Flexco.

6. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.

7. Nora Systems, Inc.

8. Roppe Corporation, USA.

9. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).

2. Style: B, Cove.

C. Characteristics:

1. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

2. Height: 4 inches.

3. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

4. Outside Corners: Job formed.

5. Inside Corners: Job formed.

6. Colors: Wetlands #150.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product

manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.













1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified

in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and

foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are

to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid vinyl floor tile.

2. Rubber floor tile.

3. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,

doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Product Schedule: For floor tile.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are

competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method

indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by

floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.




A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient

temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50

deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

65 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 85 deg F.

C. Maintain humidity within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 40% or more

than 60%, in spaces to receive floor tile.

D. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

E. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

F. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical

products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore

certification.

2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT)

A. Basis of Design Products: Ozogrip: LUT-1-OG 26706.

B. Basis of Design Products: Ozogrip: LUT-2-OG 26701,

C. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile.

2. Type: B, embossed surface.

D. Thickness: 5.0 mm.




E. Size: 7.08 inches by 47.24 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: Modern Woods.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer

for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit

floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

a. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products as recommended by floor tile

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION FOR TILE

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion

of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor

tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale

recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to

floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the

following:



a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 5

lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 80 percent relative

humidity level.

c. Three tests should be conducted for areas up to 1,000 sq. ft. and one additional test

should be conducted for each additional 1,000 sq. ft. of flooring.

5. Adhesive Bond Testing: An adhesive bond test should be performed using the actual

flooring materials and adhesive to be installed. The test areas should be a minimum of

36" x 36" and remain in place for at least 72 hours and then evaluated for bond strength

to the concrete.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be

installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

floor tile.

3.3 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Check the walls and ensure wall is square to the opposite wall in order to create a straight

square-starting row. Never expose scribe or cut ends; they should be covered by molding.

1. Installation should start the corner of the room and work your way out. The perimeter

needs to be secured for all installations to lock remainder of the floor in place.

2. Glue the whole perimeter using a pressure sensitive spray adhesive. Spray-Lock 6500 is

recommended.

3. Create at least a 10” perimeter in width for planks, including all walkway entrances and

under heavy appliance and furniture. Leave an expansion space from the wall of at least

1/8” covered by molding.

4. Once the starting perimeter row is in place, lay plank down and adjust all side and end

seams tight and square to each other. Remove and reposition plank as needed.

5. Avoid walking on planks as much as possible until all the perimeter planks are in place to

lock in the installation.

6. For planks, stagger the rows with different size planks so the ends of the planks do not

line up in a straight uniform line. No starting row piece or end piece should be less than

6”.

7. For cutting around irregular objects, make pattern out of heavy paper to fit around the

object, then place and trace the pattern upon the plank.




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying

liquid floor polish.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 096566 - 1

SECTION 096566 - RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Recycled rubber sheet flooring.


1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories installed

with flooring.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, and pattern of flooring indicated, 6-inch-square

Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified sheet vinyl flooring Installer.


A. Maintenance Data: For flooring to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sheet Flooring: Furnish full-width rolls of not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear

feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing

manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing.

B. Store materials to prevent deterioration. Store rolls upright.




A. Adhesively Applied Products:

1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by

manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive

flooring 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation

unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in

writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 85 deg F.

3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation.

4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer

recommends longer period in writing.

B. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING (RB-1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ECORE

International, Everlast, Nike Grind collection or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Aacer Flooring, LLC.

2. Action Floor Systems, LLC.

3. Amarco Products.

4. American Floor Products Company, Inc.

5. Flexco.

6. Horner Flooring Company, Inc.

7. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

8. Mondo America Inc.

9. Nora Systems, Inc.

10. Robbins Sports Surfaces.

11. Roppe Corporation.

12. Sport Court; Subsidiary of Connor Sport Court International.

13. Surface America Incorporated.

B. Description: Rubber athletic flooring provided as rolled goods for adhered installation.

C. Material: Recycled-rubber compound.

D. Traffic-Surface Texture: Smooth.

E. Roll Size: Not less than 48 inches wide by longest length that is practical to minimize splicing

during installation.

F. Thickness: 8-millimeters.

G. Color and Pattern: Protein Shake #EL 40.



















2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation approved by flooring manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and

conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of

flooring but not less than the following:

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. Proceed with

installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5.

3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of

water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

1) Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform

no fewer than two tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly

spaced in installation areas.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity

level measurement.



C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by

manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in

substrates.

E. Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48

hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing.

1. Do not install flooring until they are same temperature as space where they are to be

installed.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation.

After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors,

floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface.

C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting

by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

3.4 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Unroll sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

B. Lay out sheet flooring as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6

inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.

3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.

4. Locate seams per approved Shop Drawings.

C. Adhered Flooring: Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to

substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including

those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at

joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.



3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in writing

by manufacturer.

B. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations

and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use

protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect flooring with

plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over

flooring.



TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular, carpet tile.


1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories

installed with carpet tile.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade

resistance.

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each

Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated

on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.

C. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.



A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and

procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.




A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are


1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,

but not less than 10 sq. yd.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified

Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of

assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Comply with CRI 104.


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to

bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile

manufacturer.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,

failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs,

dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber,

and delamination.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT-1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Shaw Contract

Group “Technique Tile” #5T022 or comparable product by another manufacturer.



B. Characteristics:

1. Color/Pattern: Birch #22170.

2. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6 - solution dyed.

3. Fiber Type: Eco Solution Q ® Nylon.

4. Pile Characteristic: Multi-level pattern cut-and-loop pile.

5. Average Density: 5581.

6. Pile Thickness: 0.129 inches.

7. Total Thickness: 0.249 inches.

8. Stitches: 13.0 stitches per inch.

9. Gage: 1/10.

10. Tufted Weight: 20.0 oz./sq. yd..

11. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Synthetic.

12. Secondary Backing: EcoWorx®.

13. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

14. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

15. Emissions: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product requirements of

CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit

products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for

installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown,

of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize

running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other

conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and

potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other

materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness

characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile

manufacturer.



2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with

carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to

receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,

holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more

stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical

methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile

manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: Monolithic.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in

furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut

edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable

flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting

by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking

device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.



2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor

Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and

fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or

recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

exterior substrates:

1. Steel.

2. Galvanized metal.

3. Concrete masonry units.

4. Exterior cement board.


1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with

primers specified in this Section.

2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on interior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:



1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified,

with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at

temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equivalent products by one of

the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. Duron, Inc.

3. ICI Paints.

4. M.A.B. Paints

5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

6. Sherwin-Williams Company

7. Vista Paint.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed

in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.



C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.

1. Basis of Design: PrepRite Block Filler by Sherwin-Williams Company.

2. VOC Content: E Range of E3.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive Primer: MPI #79.

1. Basis of Design: Kem-Bond HS by Sherwin-Williams Company.


B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

1. Basis of Design: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer by Sherwin-Williams Company.


2.5 ALKYD BASED PAINTS

A. Alkyd, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.

1. Basis of Design: DTM by Sherwin-Williams Company.


2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.

1. Basis of Design: Emerald or A100 series by Sherwin-Williams Company.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,

and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:


E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop

paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with

SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate

identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient

difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.



D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply

additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint



A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal, MPI #79.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.

C. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:



a. Block Filler: Latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.



D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.





INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

interior substrates:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU).

2. Steel.

3. Galvanized metal.

4. Gypsum board.

5. Plaster.


1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with

primers specified in this Section.

2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on exterior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.




A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures, less than 5

deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equivalent products by one of

the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. Duron, Inc.

3. ICI Paints.

4. M.A.B. Paints

5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

6. Sherwin-Williams Company

7. Vista Paint.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed

in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:



1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As indicated in the color schedule, or where not indicated, as selected by Architect

from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.

1. Basis of Design: PrepRite Block Filler by Sherwin-Williams Company.


2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

1. Basis of Design: ProMar 200 Zero by Sherwin-Williams Company.


B. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.

1. Basis of Design: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer by Sherwin-Williams Company.


C. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

1. Basis of Design: PrepRite ProBlock by Sherwin-Williams Company.


2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.

1. Basis of Design: Pro-Cry Universal Primer by Sherwin-Williams Company.


2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #44.

1. Basis of Design: ProMar 400 Zero by Sherwin-Williams Company.


B. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54.

1. Basis of Design: ProMar 400 by Sherwin-Williams Company.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent.

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,

and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content

or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written

instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:




F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop

paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with

SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI

Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture

with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety

and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, excluding panelboards and switch gear.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.

c. Uninsulated plastic piping.

d. Pipe hangers and supports.

e. Metal conduit.

f. Plastic conduit.

g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, excluding panelboards.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.

c. Uninsulated plastic piping.

d. Pipe hangers and supports.



e. Metal conduit.

f. Plastic conduit.

g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having paintable jacket material.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply

additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint



A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Latex over Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.





C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.



D. Gypsum Board Substrates – Gloss Level 2:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.


c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44.

E. Gypsum Board Substrates – Gloss Level 5:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.





VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1

SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Visual display board assemblies.




and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of tackboards.



A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions

exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece,

provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are

enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is

complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and

humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.




a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.

b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing


1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.


2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY

A. Basis of Design: A-1 Visual Systems Series 100. Subject to compliance with requirements,

available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but

are not limited to, the following:

1. AARCO Products, Inc.

2. ADP Lemco, Inc.

3. Architectural School Products Ltd.

4. Aristocrat Industries, Inc.

5. Aywon.

6. Bangor Cork Company, Inc.

7. Best-Rite Manufacturing; a brand division of MooreCo, Inc.

8. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

9. Egan Visual Inc.

10. EverWhite; a division of Glenroy, Inc.

11. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.

12. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.

13. Newline Products, Inc.

14. Peter Pepper Products, Inc.

15. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.

B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated.

1. Assembly: markerboard.

2. Corners: Square.

3. Width: 60-inches.

4. Height: 48-inches.

5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.

C. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated.

1. Color: White.


















D. Aluminum Frames: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extruded aluminum;

standard size and shape.

1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.

2.3 MARKERBOARD PANELS

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated

markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core

material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with high-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat

and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive.

1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.021 inch uncoated base metal thickness.

2. Particleboard Core: 3/8 inch thick; with 0.015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet or 0.013-inch-

thick, galvanized-steel sheet backing.

3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-

coat process.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

D. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific

type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing

by visual display unit manufacturer.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.




B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations

in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the

performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,

cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual

display units and wall surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on

Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level,

and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and

accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and

grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than

16 inches o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.

C. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting

heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below.

1. Mounting Height: 36 inches above finished floor to bottom edge.


A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one

removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.



DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cutout dimensional characters.



B. Shop Drawings: For signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign to scale.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed

finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.




1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and

other loads within limits and under conditions indicated.


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Cutout Characters: Characters with uniform faces; square-cut, smooth, eased edges; precisely

formed lines and profiles; and as follows:


following:

a. A.R.K. Ramos.

b. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.

c. APCO Graphics, Inc.

d. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

e. Cosco.

f. Diskey Architectural Signage Inc.

g. Gemini Incorporated.

h. InPro Corporation (IPC).

i. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division.

j. Metal Arts.

k. Metallic Arts.

l. Southwell Company (The).

m. Steel Art Company.

2. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum.

3. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Thickness: 0.25 inch.

5. Finishes:

a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in custom colors

to match the following.

1) Color 1: RAL 8022 Black

2) Color 2: RAL 3003 Ruby Red



b. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating.

6. Mounting: Projecting studs.

7. Typeface: Custom typefaces as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs,

noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of

sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast

integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble

signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly

mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from

view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist

water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds

and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean

exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance

loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners.

6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where

possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and

other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff

castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before

finishing.




A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,





C. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication

but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.


A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness

of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion

coating, and applying and baking finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or

irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's


1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous

paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until



spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with

spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud

ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with

specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or

components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair

procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean

condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.



ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE 101423.13 - 1

SECTION 101423.13 - ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent

construction by other installers.

B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by

other installers.



B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at full scale.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the

required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample.

2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.

3. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in Project.

D. Product Schedule: For room-identification signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings

or specified.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are


1. Tools: Two set(s) of specialty tools for assembling signs and replacing variable sign

components.





A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent

construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.

c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA

Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.

2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign system with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and

characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as

follows:




following:

a. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.

b. Advance Corporation.

c. Allen Industries Architectural Signage.

d. APCO Graphics, Inc.

e. ASE, Inc.

f. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

g. Best Sign Systems, Inc.

h. Clarke Systems.

i. Cosco.

j. Diskey Architectural Signage Inc.

k. InPro Corporation (IPC).

l. Mohawk Sign Systems.

m. Nelson-Harkins Industries.

n. Poblocki Sign Company, LLC.

2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Sandblasted polymer face sheet with raised graphics

laminated over subsurface graphics to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign 0.125 inch.

b. Subsurface Graphics: Reverse halftone or dot-screen image.

c. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut.

b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

4. Frame: Horizontal retainers.

a. Material: Aluminum.

b. Frame Depth: Convex-curved frame to receive removable face sheet and

changeable subsurface graphics.

c. Profile: Square.

d. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

e. Finish and Color: Clear anodized.

5. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with concealed

anchors.

6. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille typeface as selected by

Architect from manufacturer's full range and variable content as scheduled. Finish raised

characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background

color.

2.3 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.



B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer

and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF

(UV filtering).

D. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by

manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and

exposure indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs,

noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble

signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly

mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from

view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist

water penetration and retention.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

4. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where

possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to

produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.








A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's


1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.

3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

B. Accessibility: Install signs in locations on walls as indicated on Drawings and according to the

accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,

embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully

sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install

washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template.

Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install

through fasteners and tighten.

3. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose

debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of

suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive

away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility

of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

4. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose

debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support

weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign

edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

5. Hook-and-Loop Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove

loose debris. Apply sign component of two-part tape strips symmetrically to back of sign

and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage; push to engage tape

adhesive. Keep tape strips 0.250 inch away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges

when sign is initially installed or reinstalled. Apply substrate component of tape to

substrate in locations aligning with tape on back of sign; push and rub well to fully

engage tape adhesive to substrate.

6. Magnetic Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose

debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support



weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign

edges. Place sign in position.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified

requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot

be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean

condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.



PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 1

SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.


1. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab

bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.




and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

2. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

3. Show locations of floor drains.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-

inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory.

D. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,

detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and

other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before

fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing


1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.


B. Recycled Content of Solid-Plastic Components: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of


C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 for toilet

compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS



1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.

2. All American Metal Corp.

3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.

4. Ampco, Inc.

5. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.

6. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

7. Global Steel Products Corp.

8. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.

9. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.

10. Marlite.

11. Metpar Corp.

12. Partition Systems Incorporated of South Carolina; Columbia Partitions.

13. Scranton Products.

14. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel

material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and

pattern throughout thickness of material.



1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

F. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, clear-anodized aluminum or stainless steel.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum or stainless steel.

2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, allowing emergency access by lifting door.

3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency

access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that

comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as

accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized

to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at

compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with anti-

grip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished

to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for

through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel,

or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

D. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate

requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for

attachment of toilet accessories.



B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to

conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide

shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inchwide, in-swinging doors

for standard toilet compartments and 36-inchwide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-

inchwide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance

of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring

devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets

attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters

with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise

indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster

with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and

adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into

structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb,



and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters

when doors are in closed position.

D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and

plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging

doors to return doors to fully closed position.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Public-use shower room accessories.

3. Private-use bathroom accessories.

4. Underlavatory guards.

5. Custodial accessories.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Paper towel dispensers

2. Waste receptacles.

3. Soap dispensers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products

from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,

cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless


B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products

with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-

inch minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-

theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.



2.2 WASHROOM, SHOWER AND CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. as indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of

the following:

1. AJW Architectural Products.

2. American Specialties, Inc.

3. Bradley Corporation.

4. Brey-Krause Manufacturing Co.

5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick.

6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.

B. Grab Bars - drawing designation A:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Brobrick #B-6806.99 x 18


3. Description: 1 ½ inch diameter, non-slip grip, concealed mounting flange.

4. Size: 18 inches long.


6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

C. Grab Bars - drawing designation B:





D. Mirror Units – refer to section 088300 MIRRORS

E. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser - drawing designation I:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-6867

2. Description: Twin roll dispenser.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted.

4. Capacity: Designed for two standard core tissue rolls.

F. Folding Shower Seat - drawing designation L.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #5181.

2. Description: Reversible folding shower seat with self-locking mechanism.

3. Seat: 33" wide, projects 22 5⁄16", support 400-lb.

4. Material and Finish: 1⁄2" thick solid phenolic seat, ivory. Type 304 stainless steel frame

and mounting brackets.

5. Coordinate with plumbing supplier. Certain manufacturers provide shower seat integral

with one-piece shower units.

G. Shower Curtain Rod/Curtain/Hooks - drawing designation M:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-6107 rod.




2. Description: Heavy-duty rod, Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. 18-gauge, 1 1⁄4"

diameter. Flanges 2 1⁄2" square.

3. Mounting: Exposed fasteners.

4. Provide vinyl shower curtain (#B 204-2) and stainless steel curtain hooks (#B 204-1).

5. Coordinate with plumbing supplier. Certain manufacturers provide shower rods integral


H. Grab Bars - drawing designation N:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Brobrick #B-68616.99


3. Size: “L” shaped - 24 inches by 36 inches.


5. Coordinate with plumbing supplier. Certain manufacturers provide grab bars integral


I. Shelf with Mop Hooks - drawing designation O:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-224

2. Description: Shelf with mop and broom holders and hooks.

3. Length: 36 inches.

4. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber cams.

5. Hooks: Three.

J. Robe Hook - drawing designation Q.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #672.

2. Description: Double, projecting robe hook.

3. Material and Finish: Bright polished stainless steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and

access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with

corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.

Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to

ASTM F 446.




A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

2. Fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable

Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection

cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting

methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,

cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size

indicated below:

1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square.

D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule

with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers

indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type

of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209.

2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 6 mm thick, with

Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated.



the following:

a. Amerex Corporation.

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.

c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.

f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.

g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.

h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

i. Moon-American.

j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.

k. Potter Roemer LLC.

l. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container FE-1 UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal

capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

Provide at FE or FEC.



C. Wet-Chemical Type FE-2: UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, 1.6-gal. nominal capacity, with potassium

acetate-based chemical in stainless-steel container, with pressure indicating gage. Provide at

FE-K.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall

or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated

or baked-enamel finish.



the following:

a. Amerex Corporation.

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.

c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.

f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.

g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

h. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

2.4 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET (FEC)

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide J.L.

Industries Ambassador Series No. 1017 at semirecessed locations, or a comparable

product by one of the following manufacturers:

a. Fire End & Croker Corporation

b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group

c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde PLC

d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company

e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.

f. Moon-American

g. Potter Roemer LLC

h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of

trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping



surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to

accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: V – vertical duo with pull.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet

type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open

180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to

fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers

indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,

size, spacing, and location.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER."

2.5 CABINET FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and

hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated

and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground

smooth.




B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.



C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.



2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying

with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning".

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting

topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to

achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

1. Color and Gloss: white, gloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

a. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. INSTALLATION

1. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 CABINET EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed

cabinets will be installed.


B. PREPARATION

1. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of

cabinet and trim style.



C. INSTALLATION

1. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights acceptable to


2. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

3. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.

D. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection

cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions.

2. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral

locking devices operate properly.

3. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces

as recommended by manufacturer.

4. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to

factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or

furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

5. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



METAL STORAGE SHELVING 105613 - 1

SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Four-post metal storage shelving.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, construction details,

material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal

storage shelving.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of

scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513, Type 2.

2.2 FOUR-POST METAL STORAGE SHELVING

A. Open Four-Post Metal Storage Shelving: Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding system,

designed for shelves to span between and be supported by corner posts, with shelves adjustable

over the height of shelving unit. Fabricate initial shelving unit with a post at each corner.

Fabricate additional shelving units similarly, so each unit is independent. Provide fixed top and

bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and accessories indicated.



the following:

a. Adjustable Shelving Products; a division of Karp Associates, Inc.

b. Borroughs Corporation.

c. Edsal.

d. Equipto.

e. Hallowell; Division of List Industries, Inc.

f. Hodge; a division of Durham Mfg. Co., Inc.

g. Jeter Systems Corporation.



h. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.

i. Montel Aetnastak Inc.

j. Penco Products, Inc.

k. Richards-Wilcox, Inc.

l. Rousseau Metal Inc.

m. Safco Products; a division of LDI.

n. Schaefer Systems International, Inc.

o. Shelf Esteem Inc.

p. Spacesaver Corporation.

q. Tennsco.

r. Unicor; Federal Prison Industries, Inc.

s. Western Pacific Storage Systems.

2. Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 700 lb.

3. Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel; in T- post shape; with perforations at 1-1/2 inches

o.c. to receive shelf-to-post connectors.

4. Bracing: Manufacturer's standard, diagonal cross bracing at back; as required for

stability, load-carrying capacity of shelves, and number of shelves.

5. Solid-Type Shelves: Fabricated from steel sheet as follows:

a. Steel-Sheet Thickness, Nominal: 0.030 inch.

b. Fabricate fronts and backs of shelves with box-formed edges, with corners lapped

and welded.

6. Shelf Quantity: Five shelves per shelving unit in addition to top and bottom shelf.

7. Shelf-to-Post Connectors: Manufacturer's standard connectors.

8. Base: Open, with exposed post legs.

9. Overall Unit Width: 42 inches.

10. Overall Unit Depth: 12 inches.

11. Overall Unit Height: 72 inches.

12. Finish: Baked enamel.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication: Prefabricate shelving components in shop to greatest extent possible to

minimize field fabrication; temporarily preassemble shelving components where necessary to

ensure that field-assembled components fit together properly. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid, with posts plumb and true and shelves flat

and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling

and warping.

1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight

sharp edges.

2. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed

fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

3. Build in straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to support shelf

loading.



4. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners, and similar

items.

C. Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Fold back and crimp exposed edges

of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch-wide hem on the concealed side; ease edges of

metal plate to radius of approximately 1/32 inch. Shear and punch metals cleanly and

accurately. Remove burrs.







2.5 STEEL-SHEET FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and

thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,

pretreatment, application, and minimum dry thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation


B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where metal storage shelving will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Vacuum finished floor and wet mop resilient flooring over which metal storage shelving is to be

installed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and free of

dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping.

1. Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed

fasteners where possible.

2. Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to support shelf

loading and as required for stability.

3. Adjust post-base bolt leveler to achieve level and plumb installation.



4. Anchor shelving units to floor with floor anchors through floor plate. Shim floor plate to

achieve level and plumb installation.

5. Install shelves in each shelving unit at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated,

at equal spacing.

a. Four-Post Metal Storage Shelving: Install four clips, one at each post, for support

of each shelf; with clips fully engaged in post perforations.


A. Erect four-post metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from vertical of 1/2 inch in up to

10 feet of height, not exceeding 1 inch for heights taller than 10 feet.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust metal storage shelving so that connectors and other components engage accurately and

securely.

B. Adjust and lubricate operable components to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or

warping. Check and readjust operating hardware.

C. Touch up marred finishes or replace metal storage shelving that cannot be restored to factory-

finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal

storage shelving manufacturer.

D. Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond successful

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



METAL SUNSHADES 107114 - 1

SECTION 107114 - METAL SUNSHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modular, shop-fabricated, metal sun shades to mount on exterior building walls.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 2605 - High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum.

C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specifications for anodized architectural aluminum .

D. American Welding Society- AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum .

E. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

F. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

G. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and

Tubes.

H. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM).


A. Product Data: For each sun shade components and finish.

B. Shop drawings showing layout, dimensions, spacing of components, and anchorage and

installation details.

C. Structural calculations. Provide engineering calculations for the Sun Control Devices and

mounting brackets, prepared by an engineer registered in the state the project is located.

D. Samples: 10 by 10 inches minimum size sample of sun shade panel illustrating design,

fabrication workmanship, and selected color coating.




A. Design structural support framing components for sun shades under direct supervision of

professional structural engineer.

B. Installer qualifications: Approved by manufacturer for installation of sun shade system.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide 20-year warranty for factory finish against cracking, peeling, and blistering under

normal use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements provide Series

3600 Sunshade System manufactured by C.R. Laurence Company Co., Inc. (800) 421-6144,

[email protected] or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:

1. AlumaFab Metal Sales

2. American Warming & Ventilating

3. Ametco Manufacturing Corp.

4. Architectural Fabrication

5. ASCA

6. Clover Architectural Products

7. Construction Specialties, Inc.

8. DAMS Inc.

9. Hendrick Architectural Products

10. Industrial Louvers, Inc.

11. Protean Construction Products, Inc.

12. Ruskin Company

13. Savannah Trims

14. Tajima Corporation USA

15. Unicel Architectural Corp.

B. Size: 4 inches deep by 36 inches projection. Length varies – see drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T-6.

B. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 6063, Temper T-6.

2.3 SUN SHADE SYSTEM

A. Components:

1. Outriggers: 1/4 - 1/2 inch thick aluminum plate; ASTM B 209, 5052-H32 alloy; size to

meet design criteria.




a. Square configuration

2. Mounting bracket options.

B. Exterior wall and Storefront brackets

1. Bracket to mount directly to storefront.

2. Bracket to mount directly to exterior masonry veneer wall.

3. Fascia: 1/8 inch thick aluminum extrusion; ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 alloy.

a. Square tube fascia; 4 inch

4. Blade options:

a. Flat bars; ASTM B 209, 5052-H32 alloy; size: 1-1/4 inch.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide fixed Sun Control Devices and accessories of design, material, sizes, depth,

arrangement, and thickness as indicated on Drawings and as required for optimal performance

with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance.

B. Corners: Miter corners as indicated on shop drawings.

C. Fabrication tolerances: Maximum allowable tolerances.

1. Bow: + /- 1/4 inch.

2. Dimensional width or length: +/ - 1/8 inch.

3. Squareness: +/ - 1/8 inch.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent

PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces

to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate conditions in areas to receive the work. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and

interface with adjacent work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

B. Upon receipt of Sun Control Devices, thoroughly examine units for damage. Promptly report

any observed damage to C.R. Laurence in writing. Include digital photographs of any observed

damage as well as a copy of the Bill of Lading disclosing the damage.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prior to fabrication, field verify required dimensions.



B. Coordinate Sun Control installation with Curtain Wall to ensure proper structural support is

provided, attachment of sun control devices is compatible with Curtain Wall manufacturer's

requirements, and weather tightness of exterior envelop is maintained.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for

installation of the work.

B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the

work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.

C. Anchor Sun Control Devices to Curtain Wall Framing as indicated on approved shop drawings,

and as specified.

D. Separate dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation tape where needed

to eliminate possibility of galvanic action between metals.

E. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and

replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed.

F. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints.

G. Sun Control Device installation:

1. Layout and verify centerline dimensions prior to setting outriggers [wall brackets].

2. Install the two outer most outriggers [wall brackets] plumb and level to the substrate.

3. Then, shoot a line from outrigger to outrigger to find the depth dimension of the outer

line.

4. Proceed with the installation by attaching the middle outrigger, shimming as required.

5. Shims: Non-ferrous, as recommended by manufacturer. Verify centerline dimensions

after shims are installed.

H. Erection Tolerances:

1. Variation from level: +/- 1/8 inch maximum in 20 ft.- 0 inch runs, non-cumulative.

a. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or

In-Line: +/- 1/32 inch.

I. Do not field cut or trim units. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the

approval of the manufacturer, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish

completely. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the

strength or appearance of the assembly as directed.

J. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces.



B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water.

C. Clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with recommendations found in AAMA 609 and 610.

Do not use aggressive alkaline, TSP, acid cleaners, or abrasive cleaners on aluminum surfaces.



GROUND SET FLAGPOLES 107500 - 1

SECTION 107500 – GROUND SET FLAGPOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes one (1) aluminum ground-mounted flagpole.

B. Owner-Furnished Material: Flags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics,

fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles.

B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work.

Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support.

1. Include section, and details of foundation system for ground-mounted flagpoles.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpole as complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and

anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.


A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other

protective container.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company.

2. Atlantic Fiberglass Products, Inc.

3. Baartol Company.

4. Concord Industries, Inc.

5. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc.

6. Ewing Flagpoles.



7. Lingo Inc.; Acme Flagpole Company Division.

8. Millerbernd Manufacturing Company.

9. Morgan-Francis; Division of Original Tractor Cab Co., Inc.

10. PLP Composite Technologies, Inc.

11. Pole-Tech Company Inc.

12. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP.

13. USS Manufacturing Inc.

2.2 FLAGPOLES

A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one

piece is necessary, comply with the following:

1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking.

2. Provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves.

3. Provide self-aligning, snug-fitting joints.

B. Exposed Height: 35 feet.

C. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, not less than

0.064-inch- nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate;

3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize

steel after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing

pole.

1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole.

2. Provide steel ground protectors extending 12 inches aboveground and 6 inches

belowground for steel flagpoles where flashing collars are not provided.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to

match flagpole-butt diameter.

1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum with gold anodic finish.

B. Finial Eagle: Manufacturer's standard, sized as standard with manufacturer for flagpole size

indicated.

1. Cast aluminum with gold anodic finish.

C. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and

removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with

plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock.

Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.

1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two bronze swivel snap hooks per halyard.

a. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers.




A. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.

B. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane joint sealant complying with

requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Use M, G,

A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for Use O.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.








A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, including foundation; accurate placement, pattern,

orientation of anchor bolts, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade

portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and

foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact

drainage material at excavation bottom.

C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base

at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting.

D. Place concrete, as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact concrete

in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use

nonstaining curing compound.



E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform

in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base.

3.3 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's


B. Ground Set: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting.

Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure. Install flagpole,

plumb, in foundation tube.

1. Foundation Tube: Place tube seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges and

install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in

foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch

layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar.



TELLER WINDOW ACCESSORIES 111700 - 1

SECTION 111700 – TELLER WINDOW ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Intercom.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Sections for coordinating electrical requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for specified Products indicating materials,

operation characteristics, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, sizes, rough-in, mounting, construction and glazing

details as well as installation clearances and finishes.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Submit two samples, 4 x 4 inches in size illustrating metal finishes for each finish

specified.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing firm

acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace deal trays and intercom that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221/B221M. Provide alloy and temper recommended by

manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less



than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.125 inch thick at any location for

main frame and sash members.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet:

1. ASTM A653/A653M, CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; with G90 (Z275) zinc

(galvanized) coating designation.

2. AMS5511, steel, corrosion-resistant, sheet, strip, and plate, 19Cr - 9.5Ni (304L), solution

heat treated.

3. AMS5513, steel, corrosion-resistant, sheet, strip, and plate 19cr 9.2Ni (SAE 30304)

solution heat treated.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars:

1. ASTM A666, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

2. ASME SA-240/SA-240M, chromium and chromium-nickel stainless steel plate, sheet,

and strip for general applications.

D. Concealed Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 INTERCOM

A. Manufacturers

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Haventech

Model SC-100 at Vestibule 101/Watch 136, or a comparable product.

B. Construction:

1. Material: aluminum.

2. Size: 4 inch diameter.

3. Activation: Voice activated switch.

4. Audio:

a. Gooseneck microphone.

b. Background noise level monitoring.

c. Linear volume control.

d. Level detection and attenuation.

e. Duplex communication.

5. Power:

a. 18V DC filtered.

b. Rechargeable battery pack.

c. On/Off switch.


A. Mill Finished Aluminum Surfaces: manufacturer's standard finish.



1. Clear Anodized Aluminum Surfaces: AA-M10C22A31 non-specular as fabricated

mechanical finish, medium matte chemical finish, and Architectural Class II 0.7 mils

clear anodized coating.

a. Conform to AAMA 611.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify construction is ready to receive products specified in this section.

B. Verify rough openings are correct size and in correct location.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Align products plumb, level and square.

C. Rigidly secure products to adjacent supporting construction.

D. Connect electrical components to power source.


A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.

B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces

clean.

C. Clean metal surfaces to polished condition.

D. Provide temporary protection to ensure that equipment is without damage at time of Substantial

Completion.



RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 1

SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cooking appliances.

2. Refrigeration appliances.

3. Cleaning appliances.


1. Section 011000 “Summary” for a list of Owner-furnished products.

2. Division 23 sections for kitchen ventilation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance.

B. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and



A. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:

1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



2. ANSI: Provide gas-burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards.

C. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility

requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within


B. Gas Range: Full warranty, including parts and labor, for on-site service on surface-burner

elements.


C. Ice Machine: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service on surface-burner

elements.


D. Dishwasher: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service on the product.

1. Warranty Period for Deterioration of Tub and Metal Door Liner: Five years from date of


2. Warranty Period for Other Components: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

E. Refrigerator/Freezer, Sealed System: Full warranty, including parts and labor, for on-site

service on the product.

1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System Insert item: Five (5) years from date of


2. Warranty Period for Other Components: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,

and marked for intended location and application.

B. Gas-Fueled Appliances: Certified by a qualified testing agency for each type of gas-fueled

appliance according to ANSI Z21 Series standards.

C. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility

requirements, comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.



2.2 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Amana; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.

2. BOSCH Home Appliances.

3. BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Gaggenau and Thermador).

4. Dacor, Inc.

5. Dynamic Cooking Systems, Inc.

6. Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).

7. Fisher & Paykel.

8. General Electric Company (GE).

9. Jade Home Products Company.

10. Jenn-Air; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.

11. KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.

12. LG Appliances.

13. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.

14. Miele, Inc.

15. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).

16. Viking Range, LLC.

17. Whirlpool Corporation.

18. Wolf Appliance, Inc.

2.3 RANGES

A. Gas Range: Freestanding range with one oven.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viking Professional VGIC53616B gas range – natural.

2. Width: 36 inches.

3. Gas Burners: Six.

a. Power Ratings: All burners 15,000 Btu/h.

b. Controls: Manual-dial controls, located on front.

c. Grates: Individual.

d. Other Features: Auto-reigniting burners, 8 inch high back guard.

4. Oven Features:

a. Capacity: 4.6 cubic feet (AHAM).

b. Operation: Baking and convection.

c. Broiler: Infrared, located in top of oven.

d. Oven Door: Counterbalanced, removable, with observation window and full-width

handle.

e. Gas Power Ratings:

1) Oven: 30,000 Btu/h.

2) Broiler: 18,000 Btu/h.

f. Controls: Manual-dial controls and timer display, located on front.



5. Anti-Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard.

6. Electric Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A.

7. Material: Stainless steel with manufacturer's standard cooktop.

a. Color/Finish: Stainless steel (SS).

8. Accessories

a. Backguard: 8-inch high, stainless steel.

2.4 ICEMAKERS

A. Icemaker:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Manitowoc IndigoTM ID-0502A ice cube machine and B-570

Bin.

2. Type: Freestanding.

3. Ice Capacity:

a. Production: 370 lb per day minimum, 560 lb per day maximum.

4. Machine Dimensions:

a. Width: 30 inches.

b. Depth: 24-1/2 inches.

c. Height: 21-1/2 inches.

5. Bin Dimensions:


b. Depth: 34 inches.

c. Height: 44inches.

6. Appliance Color/Finish: Stainless steel.

2.5 DISHWASHERS

A. Dishwasher: Complying with AHAM DW-1 and ASSE 1006.

1. Type: Built-in undercounter.

2. Dimensions:


b. Depth: 23 inches.

c. Height: 34-1/2 inches.

3. Capacity:

a. International Place Settings of China: Sixteen.

b. Water Consumption for Full Load: 3.2 gal. per cycle.

4. Sound Level: Maximum 42 dB.



5. Tub and Door Liner: Stainless steel with sealed detergent and automatic rinsing-aid

dispensers.

6. Rack System: Nylon-coated sliding dish racks, with removable cutlery basket.

7. Controls: Touch-pad controls with wash cycles and hot-air and heat-off drying cycle

options.

8. Features:

a. Self-cleaning food-filter system.

b. Hot-water booster heater for 140 deg F wash water with incoming water at 100

deg F.

c. Delay-wash option.

9. Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE

ENERGY STAR product labeling program.

10. Front Panel: Manufacturer's standard.


2.6 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS

A. Refrigerator/Freezer: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on bottom and complying with

AHAM HRF-1.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Samsung RF263BEAESR.

2. Type: Freestanding.

3. Dimensions:


b. Depth: 33-1/4 inches.

c. Height: 70 inches.

4. Storage Capacity:

a. Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 16.6 cu. ft..

b. Freezer Volume: 8.0 cu. ft..

c. Shelf Area: Five adjustable glass shelves.

d. Bins: Two humidity controlled, six door bins.

5. General Features:

a. Dispenser in door for ice and cold water.

b. Built-in water-filtration system.

c. Dual refrigeration systems.

d. Separate temperature controls for each compartment.

6. Refrigerator Features:

a. Interior light in refrigeration compartment.

b. Compartment Storage: Vegetable crisper and meat compartment.

c. Door Storage: Modular compartments.

d. Temperature-controlled meat/deli bin.



7. Freezer Features: One freezer compartment configured as pull-out drawer.

a. Automatic defrost.

b. Interior light in freezer compartment.

c. Automatic icemaker and storage bin.

8. ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR

product-labeling program for CEE Tier 2.

9. Front Panels: Stainless steel.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and

performance of residential appliances.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before

appliance installation.

C. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where overhead exhaust hoods and

microwave ovens with vented exhaust fans will be installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed

fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are

completely concealed.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in

each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.



D. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance

according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each

manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

components.

B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 1

SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for

mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated.

1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches long.

2. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long.

D. Window-Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on

Drawings.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind.


A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name,

and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet

and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and

humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its

intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction,

verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed

units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from

Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single

manufacturer.

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hunter Douglas

Contract CL model or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Levolor Contract; a Newell Rubbermaid company.

2. Springs Window Fashions.

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish

indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners.

1. Width: 1 inch.

2. Thickness: Not less than 0.006 inch.

3. Spacing: 22 mm..

4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish.

5. Features:

a. Lift-Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back

(outside) edge of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between

slats.

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrails fully

enclose operating mechanisms on three sides.

1. Capacity: One blind per headrail unless otherwise indicated.

2. Ends: Capped or plugged.

3. Manual Lift Mechanism:






a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind full

operating range.

b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord

pull.

4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts

ladders.

a. Tilt: Full.

b. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to

prevent over rotation of gear.

5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard.

6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Right side and left side of headrail,

respectively unless otherwise indicated.

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ladders

and lift cords and has plastic- or metal-capped ends.

1. Type: Top contoured to match crowned shape of slat.

E. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord.

F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag.

G. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment

indicated.

1. Type: End.

2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing

recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind.

H. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.

I. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss:

1. Slats: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or

coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1

including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and

warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74

deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening

in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch.



Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4

inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without

damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket

positions and blind placement indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal

noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting

substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.

F. Color-Coated Finish:

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish

complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including

pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting

performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned

with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch from interior faces of glass and not

closer than 1/2 inch from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of

blinds.

2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails.

3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent

construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and

similar building components and furnishings.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating

ranges.




A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at

time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by

Architect before time of Substantial Completion.

D. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain systems.



QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE 123661 - 1

SECTION 123661 - QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.


1. Section 064116 “Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets” for cabinets to receive quartz

agglomerate countertops.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,

methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before

countertop fabrication is complete.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops as detailed on Drawings.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for

adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.



2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 , made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch

sanded.

C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix

of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of

ANSI SS1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EOS Surfaces, LLC

“GEOS Recycled Glass Surfaces”, or a comparable product by one of the following

manufacturers:

a. Cambria.

b. Cosentino USA.

c. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.

d. LG Chemical, Ltd.

e. Meganite Inc.

f. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.

g. Technistone USA, Inc.

h. Transolid, Inc.

2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive quartz agglomerate countertops and conditions under which

countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of

countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces

and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's

written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire

surface.




C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.

Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's

written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop,

form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully

dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops

adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are

properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask

areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

G. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by

screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent

damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to

finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent

snipping.

1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
